Acts 28:27
27 For this people’s heart has grown callous. Their ears are dull of hearing. Their eyes they have closed. Lest they should see with their eyes, hear with their ears, understand with their heart, and would turn again, then I would heal them.’
Has grown dull
Strongs:
Lexicon:
παχύνω
Greek:
ἐπαχύνθη
Transliteration:
epachunthē
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
to thicken
Morphhology:
Verb Aorist Passive Indicative 3rd Singular
Grammar:
an ACTION that was done to a person or thing being discussed
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
παχύνω
Transliteration:
pachunō
Gloss:
to thicken
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
παχύνω (παχύς, thick) [in LXX: Deu.32:15, Isa.6:10 (שָׁמֵן), al;] to thicken, fatten; pass, to grow fat. Metaphorical, to make dull or stupid (τ. ψυχάς, Rut.); pass, to wax gross: ἡ καρδία„ Mat.13:15, Act.28:27 " (LXX). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
παχύνω
Transliteration:
pachunō
Gloss:
to thicken
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
παχύν-ω, perfect passive πεπάχυσμαι [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—fatten, τὰ σώματα [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, grow fat, [LXX+5th c.BC+] b) thicken, strengthen, δεσμόν [Refs 3rd c.AD+] 2) metaphorically, cause to wax fat, increase, κότον π. [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—passive, ὄλβος ἄγαν παχυνθείς [Refs] 2.b) metaphorically, make gross or dull, τὰς ψυχὰς ὑπὸ πλης μονῆς π. [Refs 1st c.AD+]; βρώσεις τὸν νοῦν π. [Refs 2nd c.AD+]“V A” 1.8:— passive, [LXX+2nd c.AD+]; to be coarsened, [ψυχὴ] παρὰ τὴν ἰδίαν φύσιν πεπαχυμμένη [Refs 2nd c.AD+]in R.1.119 K. II) passive, become thick, π. πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον, of the skull, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of humours, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of excrements, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; distinguished from πήγνυσθαι, [Refs]; of fruit juices, become concentrated, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; of oil, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] II.2) to be dulled, of the sun's light, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
παχύνω
Transliteration:
pachýnō
Pronounciation:
pakh-oo'-no
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Verb
Definition:
to thicken, i.e. (by implication) to fatten (figuratively, stupefy or render callous); wax gross; from a derivative of g4078 (πήγνυμι) (meaning thick)
for
Strongs:
Lexicon:
γάρ
Greek:
γὰρ
Transliteration:
gar
Context:
Next word
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
γάρ
Transliteration:
gar
Gloss:
for
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
γάρ, co-ordinating particle, contr. of γε ἄρα, verily then, hence, in truth, indeed, yea, then, why, and when giving a reason or explanation, for, the usage in NT being in general accord with that of cl; 1) explicative and epexegetic: Mat.4:18 19:12, Mrk.1:16 5:42 16:4, Luk.11:3 o, Rom.7:1, 1Co.16:5, al. 2) Conclusive, in questions, answers and exclamations: Mat.9:5 27:23, Luk.9:25 22:27, Jhn.9:30, Act.8:31 16:37 19:35, Rom.15:26, 1Co.9:10, Php.1:18 (Ellic, in l.), 1Th.2:20, al. 3) Causal: Mat.1:21 2:2, 5, 6, 3:23, Mrk.1:22, 9:6, Luk.1:15, 18, Jhn.2:25, Act.2:25, Rom.1:9, 11, 1Co.11:5, Rev.1:3, al; giving the reason for a command or prohibition, Mat.2:20 3:9, Rom.13:11, Col.3:3, 1Th.4:3, al; where the cause is contained in an interrog. statement, Luk.22:27, Rom.3:3 4:3, 1Co.10:29; καὶ γάρ, for also, Mrk.10:45, Luk.6:32, 1Co.5:7, al. id. as in cl. = etenim, where the καί loses its connective force (Bl, §78, 6; Kühner 3, ii, 854f.), Mrk.14:70, Luk.1:66 22:37, 2Co.13:4. The proper place of γάρ is after the first word in a clause, but in poets it often comes third or fourth, and so in late prose: 2Co.1:19. Yet "not the number but the nature of the word after which it stands is the point to be noticed" (see Thayer, see word). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
γάρ
Transliteration:
gar
Gloss:
for
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
γάρ (γε, ἄρα), causal conjunction, used alone or with other Particles. I) introducing the reason or cause of what precedes, for, τῷ γὰρ ἐπὶ φρεσὶ θῆκε θεὰ λευκώλενος Ἥρη· κήδετο γ. Δαναῶν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; but frequently in explanation of that which is implied in the preceding clause, πολλάων πολίων κατέλυσε κάρηνα. τοῦ γὰρ κράτος ἐστὶ μέγιστον [Refs] I.b) in simple explanations, especially after a Pronoun or demonstrative adjective, ἀλλὰ τόδ᾽ αἰνὸν ἄχος κραδίην καὶ θυμὸν ἱκάνει· Ἕκτωρ γ. ποτε φήσει [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ δὲ δεινότατον. ὁ Ζεὺς γ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently in introducing proofs or examples, μαρτύριον δέ· Δήλου γ. καθαιρομένης. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τεκμήριον δέ· οὔτε γ. Λακεδαιμόνιοι. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; in full, τεκμήριον δὲ τούτου τόδε· αἱ μὲν γ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; παράδειγμα τόδε τοῦ λόγου· ἐκ γ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] I.c) to introduce a detailed description or narration already alluded to, ὅμως δὲ λεκτέα ἃ γιγνώσκω· ἔχει γ. [ἡ χώρα] πεδία κάλλιστα. [Refs 5th c.BC+] I.d) in answers to questions or statements challenging assent or denial, yes, no. , οὔκουν. ἀνάγκη ἐστ;—ἀνάγκη γ. οὖν, ἔφη, ay doubtless it is necessary, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἱκανὸς γ, ἔφη, συμβαίνει γ, ἔφη, [Refs]; οὔκουν δὴ τό γ᾽ εἰκός.—οὐ γ: [Refs] I.2) by inversion, preceding the fact explained, since, as, Ἀτρεΐδη, πολλοὶ γ. τεθνᾶσιν Ἀχαιοί. τῷ σε χρὴ πόλεμον παῦσαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; χρόνου δὲ οὐ πολλοῦ διελθόντος (χρῆν γ. Κανδαύλῃ γενέσθαι κακῶς) ἔλεγε πρὸς τὸν Γύγην τοιάδε, Γύγη, οὐ γ. σε δοκέω πείθεσθαι. (ὦτα γ. τυγχάνει κτλ.), ποίει ὅκως. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἶεν, σὺ γ. τούτων ἐπιστήμων, τί χρὴ ποιεῖ; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; the principal proposition is sometimes I.2.b) blended with the causal one, τῇ δὲ κακῶς γ. ἔδεε γενέσθαι εἶπε, i.e. ἡ δέ (κακῶς γ. οἱ ἔδεε γενέσθαι) εἶπε [Refs 5th c.BC+] I.2.c) attached to the hypothet. Particle instead of being joined to the apodosis, οὐδ᾽ εἰ γ. ἦν τὸ πρᾶγμα μὴ θεήλατον, ἀκάθαρτον ὑμᾶς εἰκὸς ἦν οὕτως ἐᾶν, i.e. οὐδὲ γ. εἰ ἦν, [Refs 5th c.BC+] I.2.d) repeated, οὐ γ. οὖν σιγήσομαι· ἔτικτε γ. [Refs] I.3) in elliptical phrases, where that of which γάρ gives the reason is omitted, and must be supplied, I.3.a) frequently in Trag. dialogue and [Refs 5th c.BC+], when yes or no may be supplied from the context, καὶ δῆτ᾽ ἐτόλμας τούσδ᾽ ὑπερβαίνειν νόμου;—οὐ γ. τί μοι Ζεὺς ἦν ὁ κηρύξας τάδε [yes], for it was not Zeus, etc, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently in phrase ἔστι γ. οὕτω [yes], for so it is, i. e. yes certainly: λέγεταί τι καινό; γένοιτο γ. ἄν τι καινότερον ἢ; [why,] could there be? [Refs 5th c.BC+] [do so], yet shall ye never prevail by this means: for ἀλλὰ γ, see below[Refs] I.3.b) to confirm or strengthen something said, οἵδ᾽ οὐκέτ᾽ εἰσί· τοῦτο γάρ σε δήξεται [I say this], for it will sting thee, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: after an Exclamation, ὦ πόποι· ἀνάριθμα γ. φέρω πήματα [Refs 5th c.BC+] I.3.c) in conditional propositions, where the condition is omitted, else, οὐ γ. ἄν με ἔπεμπον πάλιν (i.e. εἰ μὴ ἐπίστευον) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; γίνεται γ. ἡ κοινωνία συμμαχία for in that case, [Refs 4th c.BC+] I.4) in abrupt questions, why, what, τίς γ. σε θεῶν ἐμοὶ ἄγγελον ἧκε; why who hath sent thee? [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πατροκτονοῦσα γ. ξυνοικήσεις ἐμο; what, wilt thou? [Refs 4th c.BC+]; what, was it? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τί γ; quid enim? i. e. it must be so, [Refs]; τί γ. δή ποτ; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; also πῶς γ; πῶς γ. ο;, see at {πῶς}. I.5) to strengthen a wish, with optative, κακῶς γ. ἐξόλοιο O that you might perish! [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare αἴ, εἰ, εἴθε, πῶς. II) joined with other Particles: II.1) ἀλλὰ γ. where γάρ gives the reason of a clause to be supplied between ἀλλά and itself, as ἀλλ᾽ ἐν γὰρ Τρώων πεδίῳ. but [far otherwise], for, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀλλὰ γὰρ ἥκουσ᾽ αἵδ᾽ ἐπὶ πρᾶγος πικρόν but [hush], for, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἀλλ᾽ οὐ γ. σ᾽ ἐθέλω. but [look out] for, [Refs 8th c.BC+] II.2) γ. ἄρα for indeed, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.3) γ. δή for of course, for you know, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; φάμεν γ. δή yes certainly we say so, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.4) γ. νυ [Refs 8th c.BC+] II.5) γ. οὖν for indeed, to confirm or explain, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; φησὶ γ. οὖν yes of course he says so, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare τοιγαροῦν. II.6) γ. που for I suppose, especially with negatives, [Refs] II.7) γ. ῥα, ={γὰρ ἄρα}, [Refs 8th c.BC+] II.8) γ. τε, [Refs]; also τε γ. [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.9) γ. τοι for surely, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare τοιγάρτοι. B) POSITION: γάρ properly stands after the first word in a clause, but in Pocts it frequently stands third or fourth, when the preceding words are closely connected, as ὁ μὲν γὰρ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; χἠ ναῦς γὰρ. [Refs]; τό τ᾽ εἰκαθεῖν γὰρ. [Refs]; τὸ μὴ θέμις γὰρ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]: sometimes for metrical reasons, where there is no such connexion, as third [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in later Comedy texts fifth [Refs 4th c.BC+]; once sixth in [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2) inserted before the demonstrative -ί, as νυνγαρί for νυνὶ γά; compare νυνί. C) QUANTITY: γάρ is sometimes long in [Refs 8th c.BC+].—In Attic dialect always short: [Refs 5th c.BC+]
Strongs
Word:
γάρ
Transliteration:
gár
Pronounciation:
gar
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Definition:
properly, assigning a reason (used in argument, explanation or intensification; often with other particles); and, as, because (that), but, even, for, indeed, no doubt, seeing, then, therefore, verily, what, why, yet; a primary particle
the
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ὁ
Greek:
ἡ
Transliteration:
hē
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Definite article Nominative Singular Feminine
Grammar:
a SPECIFIC female person or thing that is doing something
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. I. As demonstr. pron. 1) As frequently in Hom, absol, he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). 2) Distributive, ὁ μὲν. ὁ δέ, the one. the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl, Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al; οἱ μὲν. ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀. ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. 3) In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, 1) to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc, to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. 2) To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc; with poss. pron, ἐμός, σός, etc; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj, both with art, ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. 3) To Other parts of speech used as substantives; (a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc; (b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc; (with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp, every one who, etc; (d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; (e) infinitives: nom, τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf, see Bl, §71). 4) In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. 5) To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol, in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. 6) To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is, when thus written, A) demonstrative Pronoun. B ) in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article. C ) in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive singular is in many places τῶ, accusative plural τώς, but Cretan dialect, etc, τόνς [Refs]; in Lesbian Aeolic dialect the accusative plural forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, [Refs]; dative plural τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, see above), [Refs]; ταῖσι as demonstrative, [Refs 7th c.BC+] Poets also used the Ionic dialect and _Epic dialect_ forms τοῖσι, ταῖσ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν, τοὶ δέ, for οἱ μέν, οἱ δέ, not only in Lyric poetry, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but even in a trimeter, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {ὅ}; τὼ πόλεε Foed. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in [Refs 4th c.AD+] functions as genitive dual feminine, μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν [Refs 4th c.BC+] —in Elean and _Boeotian dialect_ ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, ={ὅδε}, ἥδε, τόδε, _nominative_ _plural_ _masculine_ τυΐ the following men, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] cf. Sanskrit demonstrative pronoun sa, sā, Gothic sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Latin accusative sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from *τόδ] cf. Sanskrit tat (tad), Latin is-tud, Gothic pata: —with τοί cf. Sanskrit te, Lithuanian tĩe, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] pá, etc:—with τάων cf. Sanskrit tāsām, Latin is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (which see) is different.) A) ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in [Refs 8th c.BC+] the commonest sense: frequently also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in Trag. (mostly in Lyric poetry, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τῶν γάρ, τῆς γάρ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; seldom in Attic dialect Prose, except in special phrases, see infr. VI, VII): A.I) joined with a substantive, to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with appellative, Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.—thataged man, [Refs]; αἰετοῦ. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, [Refs]; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, [Refs]; οἴχετ᾽ ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, [Refs]:—different from this are cases [Refs 8th c.BC+] if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships—I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, compare [Refs] A.II) frequently without a substantive, he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.III) placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons, ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷ᾽ οὔ πώ τιν᾽ ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —for the _Attic dialect_ usage see below A.IV) before a Possessive pronoun its demonstrative force is sometimes very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.V) for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ. without a substantive, in all cases, genders, and numbers, [Refs 8th c.BC+] properly refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter, ὁ δέ the former, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes in Partition, the one, the other, etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in genitive plural, being divided by the ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ, into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι, τῶν δ᾽ αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but frequently the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: so in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; if the Noun be collective, it is in the genitive singular, ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.2) when a negative accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.3) ὁ μέν τις, ὁ δέ τις. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν, ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.4) on τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, or τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs] A.VI.5) ὁ μέν is frequently used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ᾽ ἐσκίδναντο, Μυρμιδόνας δ᾽ οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; by ἄλλος δέ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.6) ὁ δέ following μέν sometimes refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ᾽, ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον. βεβλήκει [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rare in Attic dialect Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.7) ὁ δέ is frequently used simply in continuing a narrative, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.8) the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ᾽ ὁ. οὔθ᾽ ὁ [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VII) the following usages prevailed in Attic dialect Prose, A.VII.1) in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nominative singular masculine καὶ ὅ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Article were used (see. ὅς [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.I and cf. Sanskrit sas, alternatative form of sa); so, in accusative, καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VII.2) ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but mostly in accusative, καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ᾽ ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII) absolutely usages of single cases, A.VIII.1) feminine dative τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.b) with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —only poetry A.VIII.1.c) of Manner, τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν in this way, thus, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.d) repeated, τῇ μέν, τῇ δέ, in one way, in another, or partly, partly, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.e) relative, where, by which way, only Epic dialect, as [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2) neuter dative τῷ, therefore, on this account, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2.b) thus, so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.3) neuter accusative τό, wherefore, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also τὸ δέ absolutely, but the fact is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (compare above[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, [Refs 1st c.BC+] A.VIII.4) τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, partly, partly, or on the one hand, on the other, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι [Refs] several times. and finally, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5) of Time, sometimes that time, sometimes this (present) time, συνμαχία κ᾽ ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) [Refs 6th c.BC+] from that time, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.b) πρὸ τοῦ, sometimes written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.c) in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (literal before this [day]), and to-day's, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.VIII.6) ἐν τοῖς is frequently used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος (πρώτοις codices) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] the greatest number of ships, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with adverbs, ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον [Refs 1st c.BC+] B) ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signification in the earliest Gr, becoming commoner later. In [Refs 8th c.BC+] the demonstrative force can generally be traced, [Refs 4th c.BC+] I, but the definite Article must be recognized in places [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also when joined to an adjective to make it a substantive, αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον the hindmost man, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in τῶν ἄλλων [Refs]; also τὸ τρίτον[Refs]; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest,[Refs]—The true Article, however, is first fully established in 5th C Attic dialect, whilst the demonstrative usage disappears, except in a few cases, V. [Refs 4th c.BC+] —Chief usages, especially in _Attic dialect_ B.I) not only with common Appellats, adjectives, and Parts, to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also frequently where we use the Possessive pronoun, τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.b) omitted with proper nounsand frequently with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, see at {θεός} [Refs] III; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare Θράσυλος in [Refs]; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with proper nouns, save to give peculiar emphasis, like Latin ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.c) Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in [Refs] when he means the Platonic Socrates, as [Refs] B.I.d) for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc, see at {καί} [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.2) in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν. λεύσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.I.2.b) frequently with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.3) of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, see at {γεωγράφος}, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός. B.I.4) with infinitives, which thereby become Substantives, τὸ εἴργειν prevention, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.5) in neuter before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man; τὸ λέγω the word λέγ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', [Refs]; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ᾽ ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if. ', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.6) before relative clauses, when the Article serves to combine the whole relative clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν, καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.7) before Prons, B.I.7.a) before the person Prons, giving them greater emphasis, but only in accusative, τὸν ἐμέ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ[Refs] B.I.7.b) before the interrogative pronoun (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ποίας μερίδο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοῖς ποίοις; [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.7.c) with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc, the Article either makes the pronoun into a substantive, ὁ τοιοῦτος that sort of person, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or subjoins it to a substantive which already has an Article, τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.8) before ἅπας, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, [Refs 4th c.BC+] see entry; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs] B.I.9) the Article with the comparative is rare, if ἤ follows, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) elliptic expressions: B.II.1) before the genitive of a proper name, to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (i.e. υἱός) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (i.e. θυγάτηρ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M.the wife of [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.2) generally, before a genitive it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, [Refs]; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, [Refs]; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, [Refs]; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+] what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: and with genitive of [Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, [NT+5th c.BC+] B.II.3) very frequently with cases governed by Preps. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπ᾽ Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, [Refs] B.II.4) on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc, see at {μά} IV. B.II.5) in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (i.e. ὁδόν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ αὔριον (i.e. ἡμέρα), see at {αὔριον}; ἡ Λυδιστί (i.e. ἁρμονία) [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; but τό stands absolutely with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a substantive, as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects; both in nominative singular masculine ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, [Refs]; and in the forms beginning with τ, especially in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also in Ionic dialect Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; τό [Refs]; τῶν[Refs]—Never in Comedy texts or Attic dialect Prose:—Epic dialect genitive singular τεῦ [Refs 8th c.BC+] D) CRASIS OF ARTICLE: D.a) Attic dialect ὁ, ἡ, τό, with ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιο; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθ; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντο; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([musical notation]), Ionic dialect οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (see. ἕτερος), Attic dialect feminine ἡτέρα, dative θητέρᾳ (see. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc, before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (frequently written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Papyrus); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί=αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ. D.b) other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g, Doric dialect ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς-[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή [Refs 1st c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Pronounciation:
to
Language:
Greek
Definition:
the (sometimes to be supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom); the, this, that, one, he, she, it, etc; the definite article
heart
Strongs:
Greek:
καρδία
Transliteration:
kardia
Context:
Next word
Morphhology:
Noun Nominative Singular Feminine
Grammar:
a female PERSON OR THING that is doing something
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
καρδία
Transliteration:
kardia
Gloss:
heart
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Female
Definition:
καρδία, -ας, ἡ, [in LXX chiefly for לֵבָב,לֵב;] the heart, 1) the bodily organ which is regarded as the seat of life (2Ki.18:14, 4Ki.9:24, al.). 2) In a psychological sense, the seat of man's collective energies, the focus of personal life, the seat of the rational as well as the emotional and volitional elements in human life, hence that wherein lies the moral and religious condition of the man (DB, ii, 317f; DGG, ii, 344a); (a) of the seat of physical life (Jdg.19:5, Psa.101 (102):5 103 (104):15): Act.14:17, Jas.5:5; (b) of the seat of spiritual life: Mat.5:8, Mrk.7:19, Luk.1:51, Act.5:3, Rom.10:9, 10 Eph.6:5, al; pl, Mat.9:4, Mrk.2:6, al; opposite to στόμα, χείλεα, πρόσωπον, Mat.15:8, Mrk.7:6, Rom.10:8, 9 2Co.5:12; περιτομὴ καρδίας, Rom.2:29; ἐκ κ, Rom.6:17, 1Pe.1:22; ἀπὸ τῶν κ, Mat.18:35; ἐν ὅλῃ (ἐξ ὅλης), Mat.22:37, Mrk.12:30 " (LXX); γινώσκειν (ἐρευνᾶν, δοκιμάζειν) τὰς κ, Luk.16:15, Rom.8:27, 1Th.2:4; to think, etc, ἐν τ. κ, Mat.9:4, Mrk.2:6, Luk.12:45, Rom.10:6; συνιέναι (νοεῖν) τῇ κ, Mat.13:15, Jhn.12:40; ἐπαχύνθη ἡ κ, Mat.13:15 (LXX); πωροῦν τὴν κ, Jhn.12:40; κ. εὐθεῖα, Act.8:21; πονηρά, Heb.3:12; ἀμετανόητος, Rom.2:5; εἶναι (ἔχειν) ἐν τῇ κ, 2Co.7:3, Php.1:7; ὀδύνη τῇ κ, Rom.9:2. 3) Of the central or innermost part of anything (of the pith of wood, Arist.): τ. γῆς, Mat.12:40 (Cremer, 343ff.). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
καρδία
Transliteration:
kardia
Gloss:
heart
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Female
Definition:
καρδί-α, ἡ, Ionic dialect καρδίη, Epic dialect κρᾰδίη (καρδίη in [Refs 8th c.BC+] only in καρδίῃ ἄλληκτον πολεμίζειν ἠδὲ μάχεσθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+] always in Trag, except in some dact. and anapaest meter verses, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect κάρζα [Refs] (but καρδία [Refs 7th c.BC+] κορζία (Paph.), [Refs 5th c.AD+]:—heart, ἐν δέ τέ οἱ κραδίη μεγάλα στέρνοισι πατάσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πηδᾷ ἡ κ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]: especially as the seat of feeling and passion, as rage or anger, οἰδάνεται κραδίη Χόλῳ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; καρδίης πλέως full of heart, [Refs 7th c.BC+]; of fear or courage, κυνὸς ὄμματ᾽ ἔχων, κραδίην δ᾽ ἐλάφοιο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; [σφηκῶν] κραδίην καὶ θυμὸν ἔχοντες [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν νέον τίνα οἴει κ. ἴσχει; what do you think are his feelings? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of sorrow or joy, ἐν κραδίῃ μέγα πένθος ἄεξε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κελαινόχρως. πάλλεταί μου κ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of love, Sapph.[same place], etc; ἐκ τῆς κ. φιλεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φιλέειν ἀπὸ κ. [Refs 3rd c.BC+]. to speak freely, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; λαλῆσαι ἐπὶ καρδίαν τινός speak kindly to, [LXX] 2) inclination, desire, purpose, ἔμ᾽ ὀτρύνει κραδίη καὶ θυμός [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πρόφρων κ. ἐν πάντεσσι πόνοισι[Refs 5th c.BC+] 3) mind, ὡς ἄνοον κραδίην ἔχες [Refs 8th c.BC+], compare 7.2; διαλογισμοὶ ἀναβαίνουσι ἐν τῇ κ. [NT] II) cardiac orifice of the stomach, [Refs 5th c.BC+] III) heart in wood, pith, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ={ἐντεριώνη},[Refs] IV) metaphorically, κ. θαλάσσης depths of the sea, [LXX] V) Κ. Λέοντος, name of the star [Refs 5th c.BC+] [kcirc]ṛd-, cf. Latin cor(d)-, Lithuanian širdis 'heart', etc.)
Strongs
Word:
καρδία
Transliteration:
kardía
Pronounciation:
kar-dee'-ah
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Noun Feminine
Definition:
the heart, i.e. (figuratively) the thoughts or feelings (mind); also (by analogy) the middle; (+ broken-)heart(-ed); prolonged from a primary (Latin cor, "heart")
of the
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ὁ
Greek:
τοῦ
Transliteration:
tou
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Definite article Genitive Singular Masculine
Grammar:
a SPECIFIC male person or thing that something belongs to
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. I. As demonstr. pron. 1) As frequently in Hom, absol, he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). 2) Distributive, ὁ μὲν. ὁ δέ, the one. the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl, Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al; οἱ μὲν. ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀. ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. 3) In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, 1) to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc, to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. 2) To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc; with poss. pron, ἐμός, σός, etc; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj, both with art, ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. 3) To Other parts of speech used as substantives; (a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc; (b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc; (with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp, every one who, etc; (d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; (e) infinitives: nom, τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf, see Bl, §71). 4) In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. 5) To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol, in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. 6) To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is, when thus written, A) demonstrative Pronoun. B ) in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article. C ) in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive singular is in many places τῶ, accusative plural τώς, but Cretan dialect, etc, τόνς [Refs]; in Lesbian Aeolic dialect the accusative plural forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, [Refs]; dative plural τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, see above), [Refs]; ταῖσι as demonstrative, [Refs 7th c.BC+] Poets also used the Ionic dialect and _Epic dialect_ forms τοῖσι, ταῖσ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν, τοὶ δέ, for οἱ μέν, οἱ δέ, not only in Lyric poetry, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but even in a trimeter, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {ὅ}; τὼ πόλεε Foed. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in [Refs 4th c.AD+] functions as genitive dual feminine, μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν [Refs 4th c.BC+] —in Elean and _Boeotian dialect_ ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, ={ὅδε}, ἥδε, τόδε, _nominative_ _plural_ _masculine_ τυΐ the following men, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] cf. Sanskrit demonstrative pronoun sa, sā, Gothic sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Latin accusative sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from *τόδ] cf. Sanskrit tat (tad), Latin is-tud, Gothic pata: —with τοί cf. Sanskrit te, Lithuanian tĩe, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] pá, etc:—with τάων cf. Sanskrit tāsām, Latin is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (which see) is different.) A) ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in [Refs 8th c.BC+] the commonest sense: frequently also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in Trag. (mostly in Lyric poetry, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τῶν γάρ, τῆς γάρ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; seldom in Attic dialect Prose, except in special phrases, see infr. VI, VII): A.I) joined with a substantive, to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with appellative, Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.—thataged man, [Refs]; αἰετοῦ. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, [Refs]; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, [Refs]; οἴχετ᾽ ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, [Refs]:—different from this are cases [Refs 8th c.BC+] if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships—I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, compare [Refs] A.II) frequently without a substantive, he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.III) placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons, ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷ᾽ οὔ πώ τιν᾽ ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —for the _Attic dialect_ usage see below A.IV) before a Possessive pronoun its demonstrative force is sometimes very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.V) for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ. without a substantive, in all cases, genders, and numbers, [Refs 8th c.BC+] properly refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter, ὁ δέ the former, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes in Partition, the one, the other, etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in genitive plural, being divided by the ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ, into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι, τῶν δ᾽ αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but frequently the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: so in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; if the Noun be collective, it is in the genitive singular, ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.2) when a negative accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.3) ὁ μέν τις, ὁ δέ τις. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν, ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.4) on τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, or τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs] A.VI.5) ὁ μέν is frequently used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ᾽ ἐσκίδναντο, Μυρμιδόνας δ᾽ οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; by ἄλλος δέ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.6) ὁ δέ following μέν sometimes refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ᾽, ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον. βεβλήκει [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rare in Attic dialect Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.7) ὁ δέ is frequently used simply in continuing a narrative, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.8) the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ᾽ ὁ. οὔθ᾽ ὁ [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VII) the following usages prevailed in Attic dialect Prose, A.VII.1) in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nominative singular masculine καὶ ὅ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Article were used (see. ὅς [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.I and cf. Sanskrit sas, alternatative form of sa); so, in accusative, καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VII.2) ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but mostly in accusative, καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ᾽ ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII) absolutely usages of single cases, A.VIII.1) feminine dative τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.b) with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —only poetry A.VIII.1.c) of Manner, τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν in this way, thus, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.d) repeated, τῇ μέν, τῇ δέ, in one way, in another, or partly, partly, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.e) relative, where, by which way, only Epic dialect, as [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2) neuter dative τῷ, therefore, on this account, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2.b) thus, so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.3) neuter accusative τό, wherefore, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also τὸ δέ absolutely, but the fact is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (compare above[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, [Refs 1st c.BC+] A.VIII.4) τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, partly, partly, or on the one hand, on the other, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι [Refs] several times. and finally, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5) of Time, sometimes that time, sometimes this (present) time, συνμαχία κ᾽ ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) [Refs 6th c.BC+] from that time, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.b) πρὸ τοῦ, sometimes written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.c) in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (literal before this [day]), and to-day's, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.VIII.6) ἐν τοῖς is frequently used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος (πρώτοις codices) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] the greatest number of ships, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with adverbs, ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον [Refs 1st c.BC+] B) ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signification in the earliest Gr, becoming commoner later. In [Refs 8th c.BC+] the demonstrative force can generally be traced, [Refs 4th c.BC+] I, but the definite Article must be recognized in places [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also when joined to an adjective to make it a substantive, αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον the hindmost man, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in τῶν ἄλλων [Refs]; also τὸ τρίτον[Refs]; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest,[Refs]—The true Article, however, is first fully established in 5th C Attic dialect, whilst the demonstrative usage disappears, except in a few cases, V. [Refs 4th c.BC+] —Chief usages, especially in _Attic dialect_ B.I) not only with common Appellats, adjectives, and Parts, to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also frequently where we use the Possessive pronoun, τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.b) omitted with proper nounsand frequently with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, see at {θεός} [Refs] III; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare Θράσυλος in [Refs]; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with proper nouns, save to give peculiar emphasis, like Latin ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.c) Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in [Refs] when he means the Platonic Socrates, as [Refs] B.I.d) for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc, see at {καί} [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.2) in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν. λεύσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.I.2.b) frequently with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.3) of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, see at {γεωγράφος}, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός. B.I.4) with infinitives, which thereby become Substantives, τὸ εἴργειν prevention, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.5) in neuter before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man; τὸ λέγω the word λέγ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', [Refs]; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ᾽ ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if. ', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.6) before relative clauses, when the Article serves to combine the whole relative clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν, καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.7) before Prons, B.I.7.a) before the person Prons, giving them greater emphasis, but only in accusative, τὸν ἐμέ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ[Refs] B.I.7.b) before the interrogative pronoun (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ποίας μερίδο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοῖς ποίοις; [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.7.c) with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc, the Article either makes the pronoun into a substantive, ὁ τοιοῦτος that sort of person, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or subjoins it to a substantive which already has an Article, τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.8) before ἅπας, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, [Refs 4th c.BC+] see entry; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs] B.I.9) the Article with the comparative is rare, if ἤ follows, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) elliptic expressions: B.II.1) before the genitive of a proper name, to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (i.e. υἱός) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (i.e. θυγάτηρ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M.the wife of [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.2) generally, before a genitive it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, [Refs]; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, [Refs]; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, [Refs]; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+] what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: and with genitive of [Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, [NT+5th c.BC+] B.II.3) very frequently with cases governed by Preps. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπ᾽ Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, [Refs] B.II.4) on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc, see at {μά} IV. B.II.5) in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (i.e. ὁδόν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ αὔριον (i.e. ἡμέρα), see at {αὔριον}; ἡ Λυδιστί (i.e. ἁρμονία) [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; but τό stands absolutely with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a substantive, as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects; both in nominative singular masculine ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, [Refs]; and in the forms beginning with τ, especially in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also in Ionic dialect Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; τό [Refs]; τῶν[Refs]—Never in Comedy texts or Attic dialect Prose:—Epic dialect genitive singular τεῦ [Refs 8th c.BC+] D) CRASIS OF ARTICLE: D.a) Attic dialect ὁ, ἡ, τό, with ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιο; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθ; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντο; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([musical notation]), Ionic dialect οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (see. ἕτερος), Attic dialect feminine ἡτέρα, dative θητέρᾳ (see. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc, before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (frequently written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Papyrus); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί=αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ. D.b) other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g, Doric dialect ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς-[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή [Refs 1st c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Pronounciation:
to
Language:
Greek
Definition:
the (sometimes to be supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom); the, this, that, one, he, she, it, etc; the definite article
people
Strongs:
Lexicon:
λαός
Greek:
λαοῦ
Transliteration:
laou
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
a people
Morphhology:
Noun Genitive Singular Masculine
Grammar:
a male PERSON OR THING that something belongs to
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
λαός
Transliteration:
laos
Gloss:
a people
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Male
Definition:
λαός, -οῦ, ὁ, [in LXX very frequently for עַם, Gen.14:16, al; occasionally for לְאֹם (Gen.25:23, al.), etc;] a word rarely found in Att. prose; 1) the people at large (Hom, al.), esp. of people assembled: Mat.27:25, Luk.1:21 3:15 al; pl. (Hom, al, π; see MM, xvi), Act.4:27. 2) a people, those of the same race and language (Pind, Æsch, al: in LXX, Gen.26:11, Exo.9:16, al.): joined with γλῶσσα, φυλή, ἔθνος, Rev.5:9 7:9 11:9, al; pl, Luk.2:31, Rom.15:11; esp. as almost always in LXX, of Israel, Mat.4:23, Mrk.7:6, Luk.2:10, Jhn.11:50, Heb.2:17, al; opposite to τ. ἔθνη, Act.26:17, 23 Rom.15:10; πρεσβύτεροι (πρῶτοι, etc.) τοῦ λ, Mat.21:23, Luk.19:17, Act.4:8, al; ὁ λ. μου (αὐτοῦ, τ. θεοῦ), Mat.2:6, Luk.1:68, Heb.11:25, al; of the people disting. from the rulers and priests (I Est.1:10, Jdth.8:9, al.), Mat.26:5, Luk.20:19, Heb.5:3, al; of Christians, as the people of God, Act.15:14, Rom.9:25, 26 Heb.4:9; περιούσιος, Tit.2:14; εἰς περιποίησιν, 1Pe.2:9 (LXX). SYN.: see: δῆμος. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
λαός
Transliteration:
laos
Gloss:
a people
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Male
Definition:
λᾱός, ὁ, Ionic dialect ληός [Refs 6th c.BC+] (variant{λαόν}, which is in all Mss. in [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Attic dialect λεώς, which is also used in [Refs 5th c.BC+] and in late Prose, as Foed.Byzantine cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+] 1) in [Refs 8th c.BC+] (λαοί) usually means men, i.e. soldiers, both of the whole army and smaller divisions, κριτὸς ἔγρετο λ. Ἀχαιῶν [Refs]; periphrastic, στρατὸς λαῶν[Refs]; mostly including both foot and horse, as [Refs]; but sometimes λαός denotes foot, as opposed to horse, [Refs]; also, a land army, opposed to a fleet, [Refs]; also, the common men, opposed to their leaders, [Refs]; but 2) in [Refs 8th c.BC+], almost always means men or people; as subjects of a prince, e.g. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; λαοὶ ἀγροιῶται country-folk, [Refs]; work-people, [Refs]; of sailors, [Refs 8th c.BC+] seafaring folk, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in singular, slave, τὸν Εὐρυσθέως λεών, of Heracles, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; and so perhaps λεὼς αὔτοικος [Refs], i.e. mankind, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; λ. ἐγχώριοι the natives,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; especially in Egypt, of the fellahin, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; civil population, opposed to priests and soldiers, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] 3) people assembled, as in the theatre, ὁ πολὺς λαῶν ὄχλος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; especially in the Ecclesia, αἱ στίχες τῶν λαῶν [Refs] hear O people!—the usual way of beginning proclamations at Athens, like our [Refs 6th c.BC+]; τιμῶσιν οἱ πάντες λεῴ[Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ πολὺς λεώς the multitude, [Refs 5th c.BC+] 4) in LXX, of the people, as opposed to priests and Levites, [NT]; of [NT] II) a people, i.e. all who are called by one name, first in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἱππόται λαοί, i.e. the Thessalians, [Refs 5th c.BC+] people and λᾶος stone (compare λᾶας) is implied in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; and so [Refs 5th c.BC+] explains the word from the legend of Deucalion, [Refs 5th c.BC+] (From λᾱϝ, as shown by the proper noun Λαϝοπτόλεμος [Refs]
Strongs
Word:
λαός
Transliteration:
laós
Pronounciation:
lah-os'
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Noun Masculine
Definition:
a people (in general; thus differing from g1218 (δῆμος), which denotes one's own populace); people; apparently a primary word
this,
Strongs:
Lexicon:
οὗτος
Greek:
τούτου,
Transliteration:
toutou
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
this/he/she/it
Morphhology:
Demonstrative pronoun Genitive Singular Masculine
Grammar:
a reference to SPECIFIC a male person or thing that something belongs to
Source:
Identical in all sources
Additional:
of this
Alternates:
Tyndale
Word:
οὗτος
Transliteration:
ohutos
Gloss:
this/he/she/it
Morphhology:
Greek Demonstrative Pronoun
Definition:
οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת,זֶה;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; 1) as subst, this one, he; (a) absol: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al; (b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al; (with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl, §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3 o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; (d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν. τ. δέ (cl), partly. partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. 2) As adj, with subst; (a) with art. (α) before the art: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al; (β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al; (b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl, §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
οὗτος
Transliteration:
ohutos
Gloss:
this/he/she/it
Morphhology:
Greek Demonstrative Pronoun
Definition:
οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, etc: the dual feminine never in Attic dialect, see ὁ, ἡ, τό, [near the start]:—demonstrative pronoun, this, common from [Refs 8th c.BC+] A) ORIGIN and FORMS: οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο probably arose from a reduplication of the demonstrative ὁ, ἡ, τό with insertion of -υ- (= Sanskrit Particle u), e.g. ταῦτα from τα-υ-τα: Doric dialect genitive singular feminine τούτας [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc, the latter is uncertain in [Refs 5th c.BC+], as genitive singular neuter οὕτω [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; accusative singular feminine οὕταν [Refs 6th c.BC+] —In _Attic dialect_ οὗτος was frequently strengthened by the _demonstrative_ -ί, οὑτοσί, αὑτηί, τουτί, _genitive_ τουτουί, _dative_ τουτῳί, _accusative_ τουτονί; plural nominative οὑτοιί, neuter ταυτί, etc, this man here: sometimes a Particle is inserted between the pronoun and -ί, as αὑτηγί for αὑτηί γε, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τουτογί for τουτί γε, [Refs]; ταυταγί for ταυτί γε, [Refs]; τουτοδί for τουτὶ δέ, [Refs]; τουτουμενί for τουτουὶ μέν, [Refs] —In codices the ν ἐφελκυστικόν is sometimes added in the forms οὑτοσίν, οὑτωσίν, and οὑτοσίν is said to be Attic dialect by [Refs 2nd c.AD+]. [This ι is always long, and a long vowel or diphthong before it becomes short, as αὑτη?~Xί, τουτω?~Xί, οὑτοῐί, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B) USAGE in regard to CONCOR[Refs 4th c.BC+] is frequently used as a pronoun substantive: hence neuter is followed by genitive, κατὰ τοῦτο τῆς ἀκροπόλιος [Refs 5th c.BC+] adjective, in which case its substantive commonly takes the Article, οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ or ὁ ἀνὴρ οὗτος.—But the Article is absent, B.1) always in Epic dialect Poets (except [Refs 8th c.BC+]: sometimes also in Trag, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2) sometimes when the Noun is so specified that the Article is not needed, ἐς γῆν ταύτην, ἥντινα νῦν Σκύθαι νέμονται [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.3) when οὗτος is used in local sense, here, see below with [Refs] B.4) when the Noun with which οὗτος agrees stands as its Predicate, αὕτη γὰρ ἦν σοι πρόφασις [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δικαστοῦ αὕτη ἀρετή [ἐστι] [Refs 5th c.BC+] these were the grievances which already existed, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ταύτην φήμην παρέδοσαν this was the report which, [Refs 5th c.BC+] this was notably the greatest movement which, [NT+5th c.BC+] B.5) when 3rd pers. is used for 2nd pers. to express contempt, οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὑτοσὶ ἀνήρ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) though οὗτος usually agrees with the Noun that serves as Predicate, it is not rare to find it in the neuter, μανία δὲ καὶ τοῦτ᾽ ἐστί [Refs 5th c.BC+]: and in plural, οὐκ ἔστι ταῦτα ἀρχή [Refs 4th c.BC+]: so with an explanatory clause added, τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν ὁ συκοφάντης, αἰτιᾶσθαι μὲν πάντα ἐξελέγξαι δὲ μηδέν [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.II.2) so also with a Noun in apposition, τούτοισιν μὲν ταῦτα μέλει, κίθαρις καὶ ἀοιδή [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.II.3) the neuter also may refer to a masculine or feminine Noun, καρπὸν φορέει κυάμῳ ἴσον: τοῦτο ἐπεὰν γένηται πέπον κτλ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.4) the neuter is also used of classes of persons, μελιτοπῶλαι καὶ τυροπῶλαι: τοῦτο δ᾽ εἰς ἕν ἐστι συγκεκυφός [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or of an abstract fact, οὐκ Ἰοφῶν ζ;—τοῦτο γάρ τοι καὶ μόνον ἔτ᾽ ἐστὶ λοιπὸν ἀγαθόν [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.III) with Prons, B.III.1) personal, οὗτος σύ, in local sense, see below B.III.2) interrogative, τί τοῦτ᾽ ἔλεξα; what is this that? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ποίοισι τούτοι; for ποῖά ἐστι ταῦτα οἷς [ἔχεις ἐλπίδα]; [Refs]; Νέστορ᾽ ἔρειο ὅν τινα τοῦτον ἄγει whom he brings here, [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.III.3) with οἷος, [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.III.4) possessive, πατὴρ σὸς οὗτος this father of thine, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.III.5) demonstrative, οὗτος ἐκεῖνος, τὸν σὺ ζητέεις, where ἐκεῖνος is the Predicate, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοῦτον τὸν αὐτὸν ἄνδρα this same man, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.III.5.b) exceptionally, Διφίλου οὗτος ὅδ᾽ ἐστὶ τύπος [Refs] B.III.6) ἄλλος τις οὗτος ἀνέστη another man here, [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.IV) with Numerals, τέθνηκε ταῦτα τρία ἔτη these three years, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [στρατείαν] ἑνδέκατον μῆνα τουτονὶ ποιεῖται for these eleven months, [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) SIGNIFICATION AND SPECIAL IDIOMS: C.I) this, to designate the nearer, opposed to ἐκεῖνος, that, the more remote, ταῦτα, like τὰ ἐνταῦθα, things round and about us, earthly things, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare ὅδε [near the start]: but οὗτος sometimes indicates that which is not really nearest, but most important, δεῖ. τὸ βέλτιστον ἀεί, μὴ τὸ ῥᾷστον λέγειν: ἐπὶ ἐκεῖνο μὲν γὰρ ἡ φύσις αὐτὴ βαδιεῖται, ἐπὶ τοῦτο δὲ κτλ. [Refs 4th c.BC+] C.I.2) when, of two things, one precedes and the other follows, ὅδε properly refers to what follows, οὗτος to what precedes, οὐκ ἔστι σοι ταῦτ᾽, ἀλλά σοι τάδ᾽ ἔστι [Refs 5th c.BC+] refers to what follows, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὔκουν. τοῦτο γιγνώσκεις, ὅτι; [Refs 4th c.BC+] C.I.3) οὗτος is used emphatic, generally in contempt, while ἐκεῖνος denotes praise, ὁ πάντ᾽ ἄναλκις οὗτος, i.e. Aegisthus, [Refs 5th c.BC+] of Philip; but οὗτος is used of Philip, [Refs 4th c.BC+] C.I.3.b) of what is familiar, τούτους τοὺς πολυτελεῖς χιτῶνας, of the Persians, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ θυλακῶδες τοῦτο the familiar bag-like thing, [Refs 4th c.BC+] C.I.4) in Attic dialect law-language, οὗτος is commonly applied to the opponent, whether plaintiff (as in [Refs 4th c.BC+] or defendant (as in [Refs]; so, in the political speeches of [Refs 4th c.BC+] are the opposite party, [Refs], etc; but in the forensic speeches, οὗτοι frequently means the judges, the court, [Refs] C.I.5) much like an adverb, in local sense (compare ὅδε [near the start]), τίς δ᾽ οὗτος κατὰ νῆας. ἔρχεα; who art thou here that comest? [Refs 8th c.BC+]; frequently in Attic dialect, τίς οὑτοσ; who's this here? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πολλὰ ὁρῶ ταῦτα πρόβατα I see many sheep here, [Refs 5th c.BC+] ho you! you there! [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with a proper name, ὦ οὗτος, Αἴας [Refs 5th c.BC+] —This phrase mostly implies anger, impatience, or scorn. C.II) simply as antecedent to ὅς, [Refs 8th c.BC+] C.III) = τοιοῦτος, οὗτος ἐγὼ ταχυτᾶτι [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.IV) after a parenthesis, the Subject, though already named, is frequently emphatic repeated by οὗτος, οὐδὲ γὰρ οὐδὲ Ἀριστέης, οὐδὲ οὗτος προσωτέρω. ἔφησε ἀπικέσθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.V) καὶ οὗτος is added to heighten the force of a previous word, ξυνεστῶτες. ναυτικῷ ἀγῶνι, καὶ τούτῳ πρὸς Ἀθηναίους [Refs 5th c.BC+]; see infr. VIII.2. C.VI) repeated, where for the second we should merely say he or it, τοῖσιν τούτου τοῦτον μέλεσιν. κελαδοῦντες [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.VII) ταῦτα is used in some special phrases, C.VII.1) ταῦτ᾽, ὦ δέσποτα yes Sir (i. e. ἔστι ταῦτα, ταῦτα δράσω, etc.), [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so also ἦν ταῦτα even so, true, [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.VII.2) ταῦτα μὲν δὴ ὑπάρξει so it shall be, [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.VII.3) καὶ ταῦτα μὲν δὴ ταῦτα so much for that, frequently in Attic dialect, as [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.VII.4) ταῦτα at end of a formula in epitaphs, etc, probably short for ταῦτα οὕτως ἔχει or ὁ βίος ταῦτά ἐστιν, e.g. οὐδὶς (= -εὶς) ἀθάνατος: ταῦτα [Refs 2nd c.AD+] C.VIII) Adverbial usages: C.VIII.1) ταῦταabsolutely, therefore, that is why, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἥκω, ἵνα. [Refs 5th c.BC+] is rare in this sense, τοῦτ᾽ ἀφικόμην, ὅπως. εὖ πράξαιμί τι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτὸ γὰρ τοῦτο just because of this, [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.VIII.1.b) πρὸς ταῦτα so then, therefore, properly used in indignant defiance, [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.VIII.2) καὶ ταῦτα, adding a circumstance heightening the force of what has been said, and that, ἄνδρα γενναῖον θανεῖν, καὶ ταῦτα πρὸς γυναικός [Refs 4th c.BC+]: but mostly with a participle, ὅς γ᾽ ἐξέλυσας ἄστυ, καὶ ταῦθ᾽ ὑφ᾽ ἡμῶν οὐδὲν ἐξειδὼς πλέον [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or with a participle omitted, ἥτις. τὴν τεκοῦσαν ὕβρισεν, καὶ ταῦτα τηλικοῦτος (i.e. οὖσα) [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.VIII.2.b) καὶ ταῦτα anyhow, no matter what happens (or happened), ἐπεχείρησας, οὐδὲν ὢν καὶ ταῦτα you tried, but were no good anyhow, i.e. try as you might, [Refs 4th c.BC+] C.VIII.3) τοῦτο μέν, τοῦτο δέ. on the one hand, on the other, partly, partly, very frequently in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοῦτο μέν is sometimes answered by δέ only,[Refs 5th c.BC+]; by δὲ αὖ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; by ἔπειτα δέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; by ἀλλά, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; by εἶτα, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; by τοῦτ᾽ αὖθις, [Refs] C.VIII.4) dative feminine ταύτῃ, C.VIII.4.a) on this spot, here, ταύτῃ μὲν, τῇδε δ᾽ αὖ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.VIII.4.b) in this point, herein, μηδὲν ταύτῃ γε κομήσῃς [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.VIII.4.c) in this way, thus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to ὅπῃ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ταύτῃ καλεῖσθαι, etc, like οὕτω κ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.VIII.5) ἐκ τούτου or τούτων thereupon, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; therefore, [Refs] C.VIII.6) ἐν τούτῳ in that case, [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.VIII.6.b) in the meantime, [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.VIII.7) πρὸς τούτοις (-οισι) besides, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
Strongs
Word:
οὗτος
Transliteration:
hoûtos
Pronounciation:
how'-tahee
Language:
Greek
and
Strongs:
Lexicon:
καί
Greek:
καὶ
Transliteration:
kai
Context:
Next word
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kai
Gloss:
and
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
καί, conj., and I. Copulative. 1) Connecting single words; (a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. (b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; (with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. 2) Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult; esp. (a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss, LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al; (b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; (with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al; (d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al; (e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. 3) Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. 4) In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). 5) καὶ. καί, both. and (for τε. καί, see: τε); (a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al; (b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult; esp. with pron, adv, etc, Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ, Act.11:17; καθὼς κ, Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ, Rom.6:11; διὸ κ, Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss, BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ. (Bl, §77, 7; Deiss, BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ, 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ, Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl, §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; 1) with subjc. (cl.); (a) pres: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al; { (b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al; = cl. εἰ, with opt, Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7 " (LXX). 2) C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss, BS, 201f, LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl, §65, 4); (a) fut: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; (b) pres: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). 3) With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl, §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl, l.with), with subjc. pres, Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor, Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft, Ellic, in ll.); ἐ. τε. ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם. אִם, Est.19:13, al,] Rom.14:8. 4) = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf, Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f; Bl, §26, 4; Mayser, 152f; Deiss, BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ, Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al; ὅπου ἐ, Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ, Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ, 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ, 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ, Gal.5:10. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kai
Gloss:
and
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
καί, conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences, A) and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and, A.I) joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.I.2) to addalimiting or defining expression, πρὸς μακρὸν ὄρος κ. Κύνθιον ὄχθον to the mountain and specially to, [Refs 5th c.BC+] (sometimes in reverse order, πρὸς δῶμα Διὸς κ. μακρὸν Ὄλυμπον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; to add by way of climax, θεῶν. κ. Ποσειδῶνος all the gods, and above all. , [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently ἄλλοι τε καί, ἄλλως τε καί, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs]; ὀλίγου τινὸς ἄξια κ. οὐδενός little or nothing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. ταῦτα and this too. , γελᾶν ἀναπείθειν, κ. ταῦθ᾽ οὕτω πολέμιον ὄντα τῷ γέλωτι [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II) at the beginning of a sentence, A.II.1) in appeals or requests, καί μοι δὸς τὴν Χεῖρα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; καί μοι λέγε, καί μοι ἀπόκριναι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently in Oratt, καί μοι λέγε. τὸ ψήφισμα, καί μοι ἀνάγνωθι, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.2) in questions, to introduce an objection or express surprise, κ. τίς τόδ᾽ ἐξίκοιτ᾽ ἂν ἀγγέλων τάχο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; κ. πῶς; pray how? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. δὴ τί; but then what? [Refs]; κ. ποῖον; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τίς εἶδε πώποτε βοῦς κριβανίτα; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κἄπειτ᾽ ἔκανε; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τίς πώποτε Χαριζόμενος ἑτέρῳ τοῦτο εἰργάσατ; [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.3) ={καίτοι}, and yet, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.4) at the beginning of a speech, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III) after words implying sameness or like ness, as, γνώμῃσι ἐχρέωντο ὁμοίῃσι κ. σύ they had the same opinion as you, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἴσον or ἴσα κ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν ἴσῳ (i.e. ἐστὶ) κ. εἰ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.2) after words implying comparison or opposition, αἱ δαπάναι οὐχ ὁμοίως κ. πρίν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.3) to express simultaneity, ἦν ἦμαρ δεύτερον, κἀγὼ κατηγόμην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; παρέρχονταί τε μέσαι νύκτες κ. ψύχεται [τὸ ὕδωρ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι] οὐκ ἔφθασαν τὴν ἀρχὴν κατασχόντες κ. Θηβαίοις εὐθὺς ἐπεβούλευσαν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.IV) joining an affirmative clause with a negative, ἀλλ᾽ ὥς τι δράσων εἷρπε κοὐ θανούμενος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.V) καί, καί. correlative, not only, but also. , κ. ἀεὶ κ. νῦν, κ. τότε κ. νῦν, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) by anacoluthon, ὣς φαμένη κ. κερδοσύνῃ ἡγήσατ᾽ Ἀθήνη, for ὣς ἔφη κ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔρχεται δὲ αὐτή τε. κ. τὸν υἱὸν ἔχουσα, for κ. ὁ υἱός, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B) even, also, just, B.1) τάχα κεν κ. ἀναίτιον αἰτιόῳτο even the innocent, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δόμεναι κ. μεῖζον ἄεθλον an even greater prize, [Refs]full five,[Refs 5th c.BC+] two or three, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2) also, κ. ἐγώ I also, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. αὐτοί they also, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἀγίας καὶ Σωκράτης κ. τούτω ἀπεθανέτην likewise died, [Refs]; in adding surnames, etc, Ὦχος ὁ κ. Δαρειαῖος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; nominative ὁ κ. first in [Refs 1st c.BC+], frequently later, [Refs 2nd c.AD+], etc; Ἰούδας ὁ κ. Μακκαβαῖος [NT+8th c.BC+]; εἴπερ τι κ. ἄλλο, ὥς τις κ. ἄλλος, [Refs 5th c.BC+], not only, but also. , see at {μόνος}; οὐδὲν μᾶλλον. ἢ οὐ καὶ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2.b) frequently used both in the antecedent and relative clause, where we put also in the antecedent only, εἰ μὲν κ. σὺ εἶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ὧνπερ κ. ἐγώ [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.3) frequently in apodosi, after temporal Conjs, ἀλλ᾽ ὅτε δή ῥα, κ. τότε δή. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also after εἰ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: as a Hebraism, κ. ἐγένετο. κ. [LXX+NT] B.4) with Advs, to give emphasis, κ. κάρτα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. λίην full surely, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. πάλαι, κ. πάνυ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. μάλα, κ. σφόδρα, in answers, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.5) with words expressing a minimum, even so much as, were it but, just, ἱέμενος κ. καπνὸν ἀποθρῴσκοντα νοῆσαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷς ἡδὺ κ. λέγειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τίς δὲ κ. προσβλέψετα; who will so much as look at you? [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.6) just, τοῦτ᾽ αὐτὸ κ. νοσοῦμεν 'tis just that that ails me, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: frequently with a relative, τὸ κ. κλαίουσα τέτηκα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; and how long ago was the city sacked? [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ποῦ καί σφε θάπτε; where is he burying her? [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.7) even, just, implying assent, ἔπειτά με κ. λίποι αἰών thereafter let life e'en leave me, [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.8) κ. εἰ even if, of a whole condition represented as an extreme case, opposed to εἰ κ. although, notwithstanding that, of a condition represented as immaterial even if fulfilled,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰ κ. ἠπιστάμην if I had been able, [Refs 5th c.BC+] each exert their force separtely, as εἴ περ ἀδειής τ᾽ ἐστί, καὶ εἰ. and if. [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.9) before a Participle, to represent either καὶ εἰ, or εἰ καί, although, albeit, Ἕκτορα κ. μεμαῶτα μάχης σχήσεσθαι ὀΐω, for ἢν κ. μεμάῃ, how much soever he rage, although he rage, [Refs 8th c.BC+] C) Position: καί and, is by Poets sometimes put after another word, ἔγνωκα, τοῖσδε κοὐδὲν ἀντειπεῖν ἔχω, for καὶ τοῖσδε οὐδέν [Refs 4th c.BC+] C.2) καί also, sometimes goes between a preposition and its case, ἐν κ. θαλάσσᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.3) very seldom at the end of a verse, [Refs 5th c.BC+] D) crasis: with ᾰ, as κἄν, κἀγαθοί, etc; with ε, as κἀγώ, κἄπειτα, etc, Doric dialect κἠγώ, κἤπειτα, etc; with η, as Χἠ, Χἠμέρη, Χἠμεῖς, etc; with ῐ in Χἰκετεύετε, Χἰλαρ; with ο, as Χὠ, Χὤστις, etc; with υ in Χὐμεῖς, Χὐποχείριον, etc; with ω in the pronoun ᾧ, Χ; with αι, as κᾀσχρῶ; with αυ, as καὐτό; with ει, as κεἰ, κεἰς (but also κἀς), κᾆτ; with εὐ, as κεὐγένεια, κεὐσταλή; with οι in Χοἰ (Χᾠ [Refs]; with ου in Χοὖτος, κοὐ, κοὐδέ, and the like.
Strongs
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kaí
Pronounciation:
kahee
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Definition:
and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in connection (or composition) with other particles or small words; and, also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when, yet; apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also a cumulative force
with the
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ὁ
Greek:
τοῖς
Transliteration:
tois
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Definite article Dative Plural Neuter
Grammar:
specific neuter people or things that something is done for‚ or in relation to
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. I. As demonstr. pron. 1) As frequently in Hom, absol, he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). 2) Distributive, ὁ μὲν. ὁ δέ, the one. the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl, Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al; οἱ μὲν. ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀. ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. 3) In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, 1) to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc, to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. 2) To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc; with poss. pron, ἐμός, σός, etc; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj, both with art, ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. 3) To Other parts of speech used as substantives; (a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc; (b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc; (with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp, every one who, etc; (d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; (e) infinitives: nom, τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf, see Bl, §71). 4) In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. 5) To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol, in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. 6) To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is, when thus written, A) demonstrative Pronoun. B ) in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article. C ) in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive singular is in many places τῶ, accusative plural τώς, but Cretan dialect, etc, τόνς [Refs]; in Lesbian Aeolic dialect the accusative plural forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, [Refs]; dative plural τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, see above), [Refs]; ταῖσι as demonstrative, [Refs 7th c.BC+] Poets also used the Ionic dialect and _Epic dialect_ forms τοῖσι, ταῖσ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν, τοὶ δέ, for οἱ μέν, οἱ δέ, not only in Lyric poetry, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but even in a trimeter, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {ὅ}; τὼ πόλεε Foed. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in [Refs 4th c.AD+] functions as genitive dual feminine, μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν [Refs 4th c.BC+] —in Elean and _Boeotian dialect_ ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, ={ὅδε}, ἥδε, τόδε, _nominative_ _plural_ _masculine_ τυΐ the following men, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] cf. Sanskrit demonstrative pronoun sa, sā, Gothic sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Latin accusative sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from *τόδ] cf. Sanskrit tat (tad), Latin is-tud, Gothic pata: —with τοί cf. Sanskrit te, Lithuanian tĩe, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] pá, etc:—with τάων cf. Sanskrit tāsām, Latin is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (which see) is different.) A) ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in [Refs 8th c.BC+] the commonest sense: frequently also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in Trag. (mostly in Lyric poetry, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τῶν γάρ, τῆς γάρ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; seldom in Attic dialect Prose, except in special phrases, see infr. VI, VII): A.I) joined with a substantive, to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with appellative, Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.—thataged man, [Refs]; αἰετοῦ. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, [Refs]; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, [Refs]; οἴχετ᾽ ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, [Refs]:—different from this are cases [Refs 8th c.BC+] if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships—I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, compare [Refs] A.II) frequently without a substantive, he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.III) placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons, ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷ᾽ οὔ πώ τιν᾽ ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —for the _Attic dialect_ usage see below A.IV) before a Possessive pronoun its demonstrative force is sometimes very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.V) for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ. without a substantive, in all cases, genders, and numbers, [Refs 8th c.BC+] properly refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter, ὁ δέ the former, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes in Partition, the one, the other, etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in genitive plural, being divided by the ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ, into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι, τῶν δ᾽ αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but frequently the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: so in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; if the Noun be collective, it is in the genitive singular, ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.2) when a negative accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.3) ὁ μέν τις, ὁ δέ τις. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν, ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.4) on τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, or τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs] A.VI.5) ὁ μέν is frequently used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ᾽ ἐσκίδναντο, Μυρμιδόνας δ᾽ οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; by ἄλλος δέ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.6) ὁ δέ following μέν sometimes refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ᾽, ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον. βεβλήκει [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rare in Attic dialect Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.7) ὁ δέ is frequently used simply in continuing a narrative, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.8) the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ᾽ ὁ. οὔθ᾽ ὁ [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VII) the following usages prevailed in Attic dialect Prose, A.VII.1) in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nominative singular masculine καὶ ὅ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Article were used (see. ὅς [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.I and cf. Sanskrit sas, alternatative form of sa); so, in accusative, καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VII.2) ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but mostly in accusative, καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ᾽ ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII) absolutely usages of single cases, A.VIII.1) feminine dative τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.b) with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —only poetry A.VIII.1.c) of Manner, τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν in this way, thus, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.d) repeated, τῇ μέν, τῇ δέ, in one way, in another, or partly, partly, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.e) relative, where, by which way, only Epic dialect, as [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2) neuter dative τῷ, therefore, on this account, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2.b) thus, so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.3) neuter accusative τό, wherefore, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also τὸ δέ absolutely, but the fact is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (compare above[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, [Refs 1st c.BC+] A.VIII.4) τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, partly, partly, or on the one hand, on the other, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι [Refs] several times. and finally, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5) of Time, sometimes that time, sometimes this (present) time, συνμαχία κ᾽ ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) [Refs 6th c.BC+] from that time, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.b) πρὸ τοῦ, sometimes written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.c) in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (literal before this [day]), and to-day's, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.VIII.6) ἐν τοῖς is frequently used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος (πρώτοις codices) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] the greatest number of ships, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with adverbs, ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον [Refs 1st c.BC+] B) ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signification in the earliest Gr, becoming commoner later. In [Refs 8th c.BC+] the demonstrative force can generally be traced, [Refs 4th c.BC+] I, but the definite Article must be recognized in places [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also when joined to an adjective to make it a substantive, αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον the hindmost man, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in τῶν ἄλλων [Refs]; also τὸ τρίτον[Refs]; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest,[Refs]—The true Article, however, is first fully established in 5th C Attic dialect, whilst the demonstrative usage disappears, except in a few cases, V. [Refs 4th c.BC+] —Chief usages, especially in _Attic dialect_ B.I) not only with common Appellats, adjectives, and Parts, to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also frequently where we use the Possessive pronoun, τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.b) omitted with proper nounsand frequently with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, see at {θεός} [Refs] III; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare Θράσυλος in [Refs]; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with proper nouns, save to give peculiar emphasis, like Latin ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.c) Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in [Refs] when he means the Platonic Socrates, as [Refs] B.I.d) for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc, see at {καί} [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.2) in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν. λεύσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.I.2.b) frequently with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.3) of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, see at {γεωγράφος}, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός. B.I.4) with infinitives, which thereby become Substantives, τὸ εἴργειν prevention, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.5) in neuter before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man; τὸ λέγω the word λέγ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', [Refs]; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ᾽ ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if. ', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.6) before relative clauses, when the Article serves to combine the whole relative clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν, καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.7) before Prons, B.I.7.a) before the person Prons, giving them greater emphasis, but only in accusative, τὸν ἐμέ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ[Refs] B.I.7.b) before the interrogative pronoun (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ποίας μερίδο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοῖς ποίοις; [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.7.c) with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc, the Article either makes the pronoun into a substantive, ὁ τοιοῦτος that sort of person, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or subjoins it to a substantive which already has an Article, τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.8) before ἅπας, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, [Refs 4th c.BC+] see entry; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs] B.I.9) the Article with the comparative is rare, if ἤ follows, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) elliptic expressions: B.II.1) before the genitive of a proper name, to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (i.e. υἱός) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (i.e. θυγάτηρ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M.the wife of [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.2) generally, before a genitive it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, [Refs]; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, [Refs]; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, [Refs]; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+] what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: and with genitive of [Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, [NT+5th c.BC+] B.II.3) very frequently with cases governed by Preps. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπ᾽ Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, [Refs] B.II.4) on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc, see at {μά} IV. B.II.5) in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (i.e. ὁδόν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ αὔριον (i.e. ἡμέρα), see at {αὔριον}; ἡ Λυδιστί (i.e. ἁρμονία) [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; but τό stands absolutely with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a substantive, as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects; both in nominative singular masculine ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, [Refs]; and in the forms beginning with τ, especially in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also in Ionic dialect Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; τό [Refs]; τῶν[Refs]—Never in Comedy texts or Attic dialect Prose:—Epic dialect genitive singular τεῦ [Refs 8th c.BC+] D) CRASIS OF ARTICLE: D.a) Attic dialect ὁ, ἡ, τό, with ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιο; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθ; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντο; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([musical notation]), Ionic dialect οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (see. ἕτερος), Attic dialect feminine ἡτέρα, dative θητέρᾳ (see. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc, before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (frequently written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Papyrus); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί=αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ. D.b) other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g, Doric dialect ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς-[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή [Refs 1st c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Pronounciation:
to
Language:
Greek
Definition:
the (sometimes to be supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom); the, this, that, one, he, she, it, etc; the definite article
ears
Strongs:
Lexicon:
οὖς
Greek:
ὠσὶν
Transliteration:
ōsin
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
ear
Morphhology:
Noun Dative Plural Neuter
Grammar:
neuter PEOPLE OR THINGS that something is done for‚ or in relation to
Source:
Identical in all sources
Additional:
ears
Tyndale
Word:
οὖς
Transliteration:
ous
Gloss:
ear
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Neuter
Definition:
οὖς genitive, ὠτός, τό, [in LXX chiefly for אֹזֶן;] the ear: Mat.13:16, Mrk.7:33, Luk.22:50, 1Co.2:9 12:16, 1Pe.3:12; ἐν τ. ὠσί, Luk.4:21; εἰς τ. ὦτα ἀκούεσθαι, Act.7:57; γίνεσθαι, Luk.1:44; εἰσέρχεσθαι, Jas.5:4; εἰς τ. οὖς ἀκούειν, Mat.10:27; πρὸς τ. οὖς λαλεῖν, Luk.12:3; τὰ ὦ. συνέχειν (MM, xviii), Act.7:57. Metaphorical, of understanding, perceiving, knowing: Mat.13:16; ὁ ἔχων (εἴ τις ἔχει) οὖς ἀκουσάτω, Rev.2:7, 11 2:17, 29 3:6, 13 13:9; ὁ ἔχων (ὃς ἔχει, εἴ τις ἔχει) ὦτα (ἀκούειν) ἀκουέτω, Mat.11:15 13:9, 43, Mrk.4:9, 23 7:16 (R, mg.), Luk.8:8 14:35; τοῖς ὠ. βαρέως ἀκούειν, Mat.13:15 Act.28:27 " (LXX); ὦ. ἔχοντες οὐκ ἀκούειν, Mrk.8:18; ὦ. τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν, Rom.11:8; θέσθε εἰς τὰ ὦ, Luk.9:44; ἀπερίτμητος τοῖς ὠ, Act.7:51. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
οὖς
Transliteration:
ous
Gloss:
ear
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Neuter
Definition:
οὖς (nominative singular frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; the other cases he forms as if from οὖας (which is found in [Refs 5th c.BC+], dative οὔασι [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Hellenistic nominative singular ὦς [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: also Doric dialect ὦς [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; plural ὤϝαθ᾽ conjecture for ὦτά θ᾽ in [Refs 7th c.BC+]:—ear, Ἄντιφον αὖ παρὰ οὖς ἔλασε ξίφει [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αἲ γὰρ δή μοι ἀπ᾽ οὔατος ὧδε γένοιτο oh may I never hear of such a thing! [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὀρθὰ ἱστάναι τὰ ὦτα, of horses, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; βοᾷ ἐν ὠσὶ κέλαδος rings in the ear, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὀξὺν δι᾽ ὤτων κέλαδον ἐνσείσας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ (ἐς conjecture Dawes) οὔατα λάθριος εἶπεν [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; reversely, παρέχειν τὰ ὦτα to lend the ears, i. e. to attend, [Refs 5th c.BC+] those who have ears to hear, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ὦτα ἐπὶ τῶν ὤμων ἔχοντες, of persons who slink away ashamed (hanging their ears like dogs), [Refs 5th c.BC+]: proverbial, see at {λύκο; τεθλασμένος οὔατα πυγμαῖς}, of a boxer, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ ἀμφότερα τὰ ὦτα καθεύδειν sleep soundly, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II) from resemblance to an ear, II.1) handle, especially of pitchers, cups, etc, οὔατα δ᾽ αὐτοῦ τέσσαρ᾽ ἔσαν [Refs 8th c.BC+] II.2) in Architecture texts, ={παρωτίς}[Refs] II.3) οὖς Ἀφροδίτης, a kind of shell-fish, Antig.Car. cited in [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; οὖς θαλάττιον, ={ἀγρία λεπάς}, [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.4) τὰ ὦτα (οὔατα [Refs 5th c.BC+] the auricles of the heart, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.5) name of part of a bandage, Heraclas cited in [Refs 4th c.AD+]. [prev. cited]] (Cogn. with Latin auris, Lithuanian ausìs, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] éar, etc; details obscure; nominative singular οὖς perhaps from *ο(ϝ)ος (contained in ἀμφώης).)
Strongs
Word:
οὖς
Transliteration:
oûs
Pronounciation:
ooce
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Noun Neuter
Definition:
the ear (physically or mentally); ear; apparently a primary word
barely
Strongs:
Greek:
βαρέως
Transliteration:
bareōs
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
difficultly
Morphhology:
Adverb
Grammar:
DESCRIBING a specific ACTION
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
βαρέως
Transliteration:
bareōs
Gloss:
difficultly
Morphhology:
Greek Adverb
Definition:
βαρέως, adv. (βαρύς), [in LXX: β. φέρειν, Gen.31:35 (חרה בעיני); β. ἀκούειν, Isa.6:10 (כּבד hi.)*;] heavily, with difficulty: Mat.13:15, Act.28:27 " (LXX). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
βαρέως
Transliteration:
bareōs
Gloss:
difficultly
Morphhology:
Greek Adverb
Definition:
Related to: βαρέω, Aeolic dialect βορ-, see below, future -ήσω[Refs 2nd c.AD+]: perfect βεβάρηκα [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:—passive, see below:—weigh down, depress, βαρήσει ταῦτα τὸ πορθμεῖον [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; τὸ ἔθνος ἐβάρει ταῖς εἰσφοραῖς [Refs 1st c.AD+] [same place]:—passive, κῆρ. βόρηται [Refs 7th c.BC+]; β. τῷ ἐκφορίῳ [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: with accusative, to be indignant at, αὐτῶν τὴν εὐγένειαν [Refs 2nd c.AD+] 2) charge an account, [Refs 6th c.AD+] II) intransitive in Epic dialect perfect participle βεβαρηώς weighed down, heavy, οῐνῳ βεβαρηότες [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—later, perfect participle passive βεβαρημένος, μεθυσθεὶς τοῦ νέκταρος β. ηὗδεν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς β. ὑπ᾽ οἴνου[NT+3rd c.BC+]; οἷον βεβαρημένος as though pregnant, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]:—passive, present βαρέεται [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐβαρήθην [Refs 1st c.BC+]: perfect βεβάρηται [Refs]
Strongs
Word:
βαρέως
Transliteration:
baréōs
Pronounciation:
bar-eh'-oce
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Adverb
Definition:
heavily (figuratively); dull; adverb from g926 (βαρύς)
they hear
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ἀκούω
Greek:
ἤκουσαν
Transliteration:
ēkousan
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
to hear
Morphhology:
Verb Aorist Active Indicative 3rd Plural
Grammar:
an ACTION that happened - by people or things being discussed
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
ἀκούω
Transliteration:
akouō
Gloss:
to hear
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
ἀκούω, [in LXX chiefly for שׁמע] to hear, listen, attend, perceive by hearing, comprehend by hearing. 1) Intrans: Mrk.4:3 7:37, Jas.2:5, Rev.2:7, al; τ. ὠσίν, Mat.13:15 (LXX); with cogn. dative, ακοῇ ἀ. (see: ἀκοή), Mat.13:14, Act.28:26 " (LXX); ὁ ἔχων ὦτα (οὖς) ἀκούειν, ἀκουσάτω, Mat.11:15, Mrk.4:23, Rev.2:7, al. 2) Trans, prop. with accusative of thing(s), of thing heard, genitive of person(s), from whom heard (LS, see word): Act.1:4; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.12:19, Jhn.3:8 (Abbott, JG, 76), Act.22:9, al; with dupl. accusative, Jhn.12:18, 1Co.11:18; with genitive of thing(s), Jhn.7:40 (Abbott, JV, 116); τ. φωνῆς (cf. Heb. שָׁמַע בְּקוֹל, Exo.18:19), Jhn.5:25, 28 Act.9:7 (on the distinction bet. this and ἀ. φωνήν, ib. 4, see M, Pr., 66; Field, Notes, 117; Abbott, Essays, 93f.); of God answering prayer, Jhn.9:31, 1Jn.5:14, 15; with accusative of thing(s), before παρά, Jhn.8:26, 40 Act.10:22, 2Ti.2:2; id. before ἀπό, 1Jn.1:5; with genitive pars. before ptcp, Mrk.14:58, Luk.18:36, al. (On NT usage generally, see Bl, §36, 5; Cremer, 82.) (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ἀκούω
Transliteration:
akouō
Gloss:
to hear
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
ἀκούω: Epic dialect imperfect ᾰκουον[Refs 8th c.BC+]future ἀκούσομαι (active ἀκούσω first in [NT+4th c.BC+]aorist ἤκουσα, Epic dialect ᾰκουσα[Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect ἀκήκοα, Laconian dialect ἄκουκα[Refs 1st c.AD+]; ἤκουκα is a late form, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; later Ionic dialect ἀκήκουκα[Refs 3rd c.BC+]: pluperfect ἀκηκόειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; old Attic dialect ἠκηκόη[Refs 5th c.BC+] —rare in middle, present (see. below [Refs]: Epic dialect imperfect ἀκούετο[Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist ἠκουσάμην[Refs 2nd c.BC+]:—passive, future ἀκουσθήσομαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἠκούσθην[Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect ἤκουσμαι[Refs 1st c.BC+]; ἀκήκουσμαι is uncertain in [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: pluperfect ἤκουστο[Refs 4th c.BC+], (παρ-) [Refs 1st c.AD+]:—hear, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: properly with accusative of thing heard, genitive of person from whom it is heard, ταῦτα Καλυψοῦς ἤκουσα[Refs 8th c.BC+]; or the accusative of things, ἄκουε τοῦ θανόντος[Refs]:—also with genitive _of things_, φθογγῆς, κτύπου, hear it, [Refs 8th c.BC+] in middle, ἀκούετο λαὸς ἀϋτῆς[Refs 8th c.BC+] b) with genitive objecti, hear of, hear tell of, ἀ. πατρός[Refs 8th c.BC+]participle, τεθνηῶτος (i.e. πατρός) ἀκούσῃς[Refs]; but εἰ. πατρὸς νόστον ἀ.[Refs 8th c.BC+] c) in Prose the person from whom thing is heard frequently takes preposition, ἀ. τι ἀπό, ἐκ, παρά, πρός τινος, first in [Refs 8th c.BC+] d) less frequently with double genitive person et of things, hear of a thing from a person, as [Refs 8th c.BC+] e) with participle or infinitive added, as εἰ πτώσσοντας ὑφ᾽ Ἕκτορι πάντας ἀκούσαι should he hear that all are now crouching under Hector, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀ. αὐτὸν ὄλβιον εἶναι to hear [generally] that he is happy, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν Δαίδαλον οὐκ ἀκήκοας, ὁτι; [Refs 5th c.BC+] f) with genitive et participle, to express what one actually hears from a person, ταῦτ᾽. ἤκουον σαφῶς Ὀδυσσέως λέγοντος[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. τινὸς λέγοντος, διαλεγομένου, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: rarely with accusative et participle, [Refs 5th c.BC+] 2) know by hearsay, ἔξοιδ᾽ ἀκούων[Refs 5th c.BC+]: present is used like a perfect, νῆσός τις Συρίη κικλήσκεται, εἴ που ἀκούεις[Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Prose, [Refs 5th c.BC+] 3) absolutely, hearken, give ear, especially in proclamations, ἀκούετε λεῴ oyez! oyez! Susar.[Refs 5th c.BC+] 4) οἱ ἀκούοντες readers of a book, [Refs 2nd c.BC+] II) listen to, give ear to, with genitive, [Refs 8th c.BC+]participle after dative, ὅττι οἱ ὦκ᾽ ἤκουσε. θεὸς εὐξαμένοιο[Refs] II.2) obey, βασιλῆος, θεοῦ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —middle, Λεωφίλου δ᾽ ἀκούεται [πάντα] [Refs 7th c.BC+] II.3) hear and understand, κλύοντες οὐκ ἤκουον[Refs 5th c.BC+] II.4) to be a pupil of, with genitive, [Refs 3rd c.AD+] III) after [Refs 8th c.BC+]passive to λέγειν, hear oneself called, be called, like Latin audire, εἴπερ ὄρθ᾽ ἀκούεις, Ζεῦ[Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently with εὖ and κακῶς, κακῶς ἀ. ὑπό τινος to be ill spoken of by one; πρός τινος[Refs 5th c.BC+].; περί τινος for a thing, [Refs].; ἄμεινον, ἄριστα ἀ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] III.2) with nominative of subject, ἀκούειν κακός, καλός, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; later in passive in this sense, [Refs 4th c.AD+] III.3) with infinitive, ἤκουον εἶναι πρῶτοι were said to be first, [Refs 5th c.BC+] III.4) with accusative of things, ἀ. κακά have evil spoken of one, [Refs 5th c.BC+] III.5) οὕτως ἀ. hear it so said, i. e. at first hearing, ὡς οὕτω γ᾽ ἀκοῦσαι[Refs 5th c.BC+] IV) understand, take in a certain sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τι ἐπί τινος [Refs 5th c.BC+] V) Astrology texts, aspect mutually, of signs equidistant from an equinoctial sign, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; also, ={ὑπακούειν} (which see), [Refs]
Strongs
Word:
ἀκούω
Transliteration:
akoúō
Pronounciation:
ak-oo'-o
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Verb
Definition:
to hear (in various senses); give (in the) audience (of), come (to the ears), (shall) hear(-er, -ken), be noised, be reported, understand; a primary verb
and
Strongs:
Lexicon:
καί
Greek:
καὶ
Transliteration:
kai
Context:
Next word
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kai
Gloss:
and
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
καί, conj., and I. Copulative. 1) Connecting single words; (a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. (b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; (with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. 2) Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult; esp. (a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss, LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al; (b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; (with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al; (d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al; (e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. 3) Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. 4) In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). 5) καὶ. καί, both. and (for τε. καί, see: τε); (a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al; (b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult; esp. with pron, adv, etc, Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ, Act.11:17; καθὼς κ, Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ, Rom.6:11; διὸ κ, Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss, BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ. (Bl, §77, 7; Deiss, BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ, 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ, Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl, §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; 1) with subjc. (cl.); (a) pres: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al; { (b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al; = cl. εἰ, with opt, Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7 " (LXX). 2) C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss, BS, 201f, LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl, §65, 4); (a) fut: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; (b) pres: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). 3) With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl, §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl, l.with), with subjc. pres, Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor, Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft, Ellic, in ll.); ἐ. τε. ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם. אִם, Est.19:13, al,] Rom.14:8. 4) = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf, Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f; Bl, §26, 4; Mayser, 152f; Deiss, BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ, Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al; ὅπου ἐ, Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ, Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ, 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ, 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ, Gal.5:10. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kai
Gloss:
and
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
καί, conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences, A) and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and, A.I) joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.I.2) to addalimiting or defining expression, πρὸς μακρὸν ὄρος κ. Κύνθιον ὄχθον to the mountain and specially to, [Refs 5th c.BC+] (sometimes in reverse order, πρὸς δῶμα Διὸς κ. μακρὸν Ὄλυμπον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; to add by way of climax, θεῶν. κ. Ποσειδῶνος all the gods, and above all. , [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently ἄλλοι τε καί, ἄλλως τε καί, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs]; ὀλίγου τινὸς ἄξια κ. οὐδενός little or nothing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. ταῦτα and this too. , γελᾶν ἀναπείθειν, κ. ταῦθ᾽ οὕτω πολέμιον ὄντα τῷ γέλωτι [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II) at the beginning of a sentence, A.II.1) in appeals or requests, καί μοι δὸς τὴν Χεῖρα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; καί μοι λέγε, καί μοι ἀπόκριναι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently in Oratt, καί μοι λέγε. τὸ ψήφισμα, καί μοι ἀνάγνωθι, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.2) in questions, to introduce an objection or express surprise, κ. τίς τόδ᾽ ἐξίκοιτ᾽ ἂν ἀγγέλων τάχο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; κ. πῶς; pray how? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. δὴ τί; but then what? [Refs]; κ. ποῖον; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τίς εἶδε πώποτε βοῦς κριβανίτα; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κἄπειτ᾽ ἔκανε; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τίς πώποτε Χαριζόμενος ἑτέρῳ τοῦτο εἰργάσατ; [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.3) ={καίτοι}, and yet, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.4) at the beginning of a speech, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III) after words implying sameness or like ness, as, γνώμῃσι ἐχρέωντο ὁμοίῃσι κ. σύ they had the same opinion as you, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἴσον or ἴσα κ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν ἴσῳ (i.e. ἐστὶ) κ. εἰ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.2) after words implying comparison or opposition, αἱ δαπάναι οὐχ ὁμοίως κ. πρίν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.3) to express simultaneity, ἦν ἦμαρ δεύτερον, κἀγὼ κατηγόμην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; παρέρχονταί τε μέσαι νύκτες κ. ψύχεται [τὸ ὕδωρ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι] οὐκ ἔφθασαν τὴν ἀρχὴν κατασχόντες κ. Θηβαίοις εὐθὺς ἐπεβούλευσαν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.IV) joining an affirmative clause with a negative, ἀλλ᾽ ὥς τι δράσων εἷρπε κοὐ θανούμενος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.V) καί, καί. correlative, not only, but also. , κ. ἀεὶ κ. νῦν, κ. τότε κ. νῦν, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) by anacoluthon, ὣς φαμένη κ. κερδοσύνῃ ἡγήσατ᾽ Ἀθήνη, for ὣς ἔφη κ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔρχεται δὲ αὐτή τε. κ. τὸν υἱὸν ἔχουσα, for κ. ὁ υἱός, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B) even, also, just, B.1) τάχα κεν κ. ἀναίτιον αἰτιόῳτο even the innocent, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δόμεναι κ. μεῖζον ἄεθλον an even greater prize, [Refs]full five,[Refs 5th c.BC+] two or three, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2) also, κ. ἐγώ I also, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. αὐτοί they also, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἀγίας καὶ Σωκράτης κ. τούτω ἀπεθανέτην likewise died, [Refs]; in adding surnames, etc, Ὦχος ὁ κ. Δαρειαῖος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; nominative ὁ κ. first in [Refs 1st c.BC+], frequently later, [Refs 2nd c.AD+], etc; Ἰούδας ὁ κ. Μακκαβαῖος [NT+8th c.BC+]; εἴπερ τι κ. ἄλλο, ὥς τις κ. ἄλλος, [Refs 5th c.BC+], not only, but also. , see at {μόνος}; οὐδὲν μᾶλλον. ἢ οὐ καὶ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2.b) frequently used both in the antecedent and relative clause, where we put also in the antecedent only, εἰ μὲν κ. σὺ εἶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ὧνπερ κ. ἐγώ [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.3) frequently in apodosi, after temporal Conjs, ἀλλ᾽ ὅτε δή ῥα, κ. τότε δή. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also after εἰ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: as a Hebraism, κ. ἐγένετο. κ. [LXX+NT] B.4) with Advs, to give emphasis, κ. κάρτα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. λίην full surely, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. πάλαι, κ. πάνυ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. μάλα, κ. σφόδρα, in answers, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.5) with words expressing a minimum, even so much as, were it but, just, ἱέμενος κ. καπνὸν ἀποθρῴσκοντα νοῆσαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷς ἡδὺ κ. λέγειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τίς δὲ κ. προσβλέψετα; who will so much as look at you? [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.6) just, τοῦτ᾽ αὐτὸ κ. νοσοῦμεν 'tis just that that ails me, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: frequently with a relative, τὸ κ. κλαίουσα τέτηκα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; and how long ago was the city sacked? [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ποῦ καί σφε θάπτε; where is he burying her? [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.7) even, just, implying assent, ἔπειτά με κ. λίποι αἰών thereafter let life e'en leave me, [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.8) κ. εἰ even if, of a whole condition represented as an extreme case, opposed to εἰ κ. although, notwithstanding that, of a condition represented as immaterial even if fulfilled,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰ κ. ἠπιστάμην if I had been able, [Refs 5th c.BC+] each exert their force separtely, as εἴ περ ἀδειής τ᾽ ἐστί, καὶ εἰ. and if. [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.9) before a Participle, to represent either καὶ εἰ, or εἰ καί, although, albeit, Ἕκτορα κ. μεμαῶτα μάχης σχήσεσθαι ὀΐω, for ἢν κ. μεμάῃ, how much soever he rage, although he rage, [Refs 8th c.BC+] C) Position: καί and, is by Poets sometimes put after another word, ἔγνωκα, τοῖσδε κοὐδὲν ἀντειπεῖν ἔχω, for καὶ τοῖσδε οὐδέν [Refs 4th c.BC+] C.2) καί also, sometimes goes between a preposition and its case, ἐν κ. θαλάσσᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.3) very seldom at the end of a verse, [Refs 5th c.BC+] D) crasis: with ᾰ, as κἄν, κἀγαθοί, etc; with ε, as κἀγώ, κἄπειτα, etc, Doric dialect κἠγώ, κἤπειτα, etc; with η, as Χἠ, Χἠμέρη, Χἠμεῖς, etc; with ῐ in Χἰκετεύετε, Χἰλαρ; with ο, as Χὠ, Χὤστις, etc; with υ in Χὐμεῖς, Χὐποχείριον, etc; with ω in the pronoun ᾧ, Χ; with αι, as κᾀσχρῶ; with αυ, as καὐτό; with ει, as κεἰ, κεἰς (but also κἀς), κᾆτ; with εὐ, as κεὐγένεια, κεὐσταλή; with οι in Χοἰ (Χᾠ [Refs]; with ου in Χοὖτος, κοὐ, κοὐδέ, and the like.
Strongs
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kaí
Pronounciation:
kahee
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Definition:
and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in connection (or composition) with other particles or small words; and, also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when, yet; apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also a cumulative force
the
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ὁ
Greek:
τοὺς
Transliteration:
tous
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Definite article Accusative Plural Masculine
Grammar:
SPECIFIC male people or things that are having something done to them
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. I. As demonstr. pron. 1) As frequently in Hom, absol, he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). 2) Distributive, ὁ μὲν. ὁ δέ, the one. the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl, Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al; οἱ μὲν. ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀. ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. 3) In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, 1) to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc, to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. 2) To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc; with poss. pron, ἐμός, σός, etc; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj, both with art, ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. 3) To Other parts of speech used as substantives; (a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc; (b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc; (with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp, every one who, etc; (d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; (e) infinitives: nom, τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf, see Bl, §71). 4) In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. 5) To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol, in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. 6) To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is, when thus written, A) demonstrative Pronoun. B ) in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article. C ) in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive singular is in many places τῶ, accusative plural τώς, but Cretan dialect, etc, τόνς [Refs]; in Lesbian Aeolic dialect the accusative plural forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, [Refs]; dative plural τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, see above), [Refs]; ταῖσι as demonstrative, [Refs 7th c.BC+] Poets also used the Ionic dialect and _Epic dialect_ forms τοῖσι, ταῖσ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν, τοὶ δέ, for οἱ μέν, οἱ δέ, not only in Lyric poetry, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but even in a trimeter, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {ὅ}; τὼ πόλεε Foed. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in [Refs 4th c.AD+] functions as genitive dual feminine, μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν [Refs 4th c.BC+] —in Elean and _Boeotian dialect_ ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, ={ὅδε}, ἥδε, τόδε, _nominative_ _plural_ _masculine_ τυΐ the following men, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] cf. Sanskrit demonstrative pronoun sa, sā, Gothic sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Latin accusative sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from *τόδ] cf. Sanskrit tat (tad), Latin is-tud, Gothic pata: —with τοί cf. Sanskrit te, Lithuanian tĩe, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] pá, etc:—with τάων cf. Sanskrit tāsām, Latin is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (which see) is different.) A) ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in [Refs 8th c.BC+] the commonest sense: frequently also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in Trag. (mostly in Lyric poetry, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τῶν γάρ, τῆς γάρ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; seldom in Attic dialect Prose, except in special phrases, see infr. VI, VII): A.I) joined with a substantive, to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with appellative, Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.—thataged man, [Refs]; αἰετοῦ. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, [Refs]; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, [Refs]; οἴχετ᾽ ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, [Refs]:—different from this are cases [Refs 8th c.BC+] if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships—I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, compare [Refs] A.II) frequently without a substantive, he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.III) placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons, ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷ᾽ οὔ πώ τιν᾽ ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —for the _Attic dialect_ usage see below A.IV) before a Possessive pronoun its demonstrative force is sometimes very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.V) for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ. without a substantive, in all cases, genders, and numbers, [Refs 8th c.BC+] properly refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter, ὁ δέ the former, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes in Partition, the one, the other, etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in genitive plural, being divided by the ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ, into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι, τῶν δ᾽ αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but frequently the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: so in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; if the Noun be collective, it is in the genitive singular, ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.2) when a negative accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.3) ὁ μέν τις, ὁ δέ τις. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν, ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.4) on τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, or τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs] A.VI.5) ὁ μέν is frequently used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ᾽ ἐσκίδναντο, Μυρμιδόνας δ᾽ οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; by ἄλλος δέ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.6) ὁ δέ following μέν sometimes refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ᾽, ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον. βεβλήκει [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rare in Attic dialect Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.7) ὁ δέ is frequently used simply in continuing a narrative, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.8) the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ᾽ ὁ. οὔθ᾽ ὁ [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VII) the following usages prevailed in Attic dialect Prose, A.VII.1) in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nominative singular masculine καὶ ὅ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Article were used (see. ὅς [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.I and cf. Sanskrit sas, alternatative form of sa); so, in accusative, καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VII.2) ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but mostly in accusative, καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ᾽ ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII) absolutely usages of single cases, A.VIII.1) feminine dative τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.b) with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —only poetry A.VIII.1.c) of Manner, τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν in this way, thus, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.d) repeated, τῇ μέν, τῇ δέ, in one way, in another, or partly, partly, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.e) relative, where, by which way, only Epic dialect, as [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2) neuter dative τῷ, therefore, on this account, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2.b) thus, so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.3) neuter accusative τό, wherefore, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also τὸ δέ absolutely, but the fact is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (compare above[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, [Refs 1st c.BC+] A.VIII.4) τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, partly, partly, or on the one hand, on the other, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι [Refs] several times. and finally, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5) of Time, sometimes that time, sometimes this (present) time, συνμαχία κ᾽ ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) [Refs 6th c.BC+] from that time, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.b) πρὸ τοῦ, sometimes written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.c) in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (literal before this [day]), and to-day's, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.VIII.6) ἐν τοῖς is frequently used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος (πρώτοις codices) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] the greatest number of ships, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with adverbs, ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον [Refs 1st c.BC+] B) ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signification in the earliest Gr, becoming commoner later. In [Refs 8th c.BC+] the demonstrative force can generally be traced, [Refs 4th c.BC+] I, but the definite Article must be recognized in places [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also when joined to an adjective to make it a substantive, αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον the hindmost man, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in τῶν ἄλλων [Refs]; also τὸ τρίτον[Refs]; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest,[Refs]—The true Article, however, is first fully established in 5th C Attic dialect, whilst the demonstrative usage disappears, except in a few cases, V. [Refs 4th c.BC+] —Chief usages, especially in _Attic dialect_ B.I) not only with common Appellats, adjectives, and Parts, to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also frequently where we use the Possessive pronoun, τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.b) omitted with proper nounsand frequently with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, see at {θεός} [Refs] III; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare Θράσυλος in [Refs]; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with proper nouns, save to give peculiar emphasis, like Latin ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.c) Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in [Refs] when he means the Platonic Socrates, as [Refs] B.I.d) for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc, see at {καί} [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.2) in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν. λεύσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.I.2.b) frequently with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.3) of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, see at {γεωγράφος}, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός. B.I.4) with infinitives, which thereby become Substantives, τὸ εἴργειν prevention, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.5) in neuter before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man; τὸ λέγω the word λέγ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', [Refs]; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ᾽ ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if. ', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.6) before relative clauses, when the Article serves to combine the whole relative clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν, καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.7) before Prons, B.I.7.a) before the person Prons, giving them greater emphasis, but only in accusative, τὸν ἐμέ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ[Refs] B.I.7.b) before the interrogative pronoun (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ποίας μερίδο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοῖς ποίοις; [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.7.c) with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc, the Article either makes the pronoun into a substantive, ὁ τοιοῦτος that sort of person, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or subjoins it to a substantive which already has an Article, τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.8) before ἅπας, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, [Refs 4th c.BC+] see entry; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs] B.I.9) the Article with the comparative is rare, if ἤ follows, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) elliptic expressions: B.II.1) before the genitive of a proper name, to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (i.e. υἱός) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (i.e. θυγάτηρ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M.the wife of [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.2) generally, before a genitive it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, [Refs]; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, [Refs]; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, [Refs]; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+] what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: and with genitive of [Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, [NT+5th c.BC+] B.II.3) very frequently with cases governed by Preps. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπ᾽ Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, [Refs] B.II.4) on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc, see at {μά} IV. B.II.5) in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (i.e. ὁδόν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ αὔριον (i.e. ἡμέρα), see at {αὔριον}; ἡ Λυδιστί (i.e. ἁρμονία) [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; but τό stands absolutely with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a substantive, as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects; both in nominative singular masculine ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, [Refs]; and in the forms beginning with τ, especially in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also in Ionic dialect Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; τό [Refs]; τῶν[Refs]—Never in Comedy texts or Attic dialect Prose:—Epic dialect genitive singular τεῦ [Refs 8th c.BC+] D) CRASIS OF ARTICLE: D.a) Attic dialect ὁ, ἡ, τό, with ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιο; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθ; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντο; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([musical notation]), Ionic dialect οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (see. ἕτερος), Attic dialect feminine ἡτέρα, dative θητέρᾳ (see. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc, before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (frequently written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Papyrus); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί=αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ. D.b) other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g, Doric dialect ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς-[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή [Refs 1st c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Pronounciation:
to
Language:
Greek
Definition:
the (sometimes to be supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom); the, this, that, one, he, she, it, etc; the definite article
eyes
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ὀφθαλμός
Greek:
ὀφθαλμοὺς
Transliteration:
ophthalmous
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
eye
Morphhology:
Noun Accusative Plural Masculine
Grammar:
male PEOPLE OR THINGS that are having something done to them
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
ὀφθαλμός
Transliteration:
ophthalmos
Gloss:
eye
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Male
Definition:
ὀφθαλμός, -οῦ, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for עַיִן;] the eye (as in cl, chiefly pl.): Mat.5:38, Mrk.9:47, Luk.6:41, Jhn.9:6, al; τοὺς ὀ. ἐξορύθσσειν (figuratively), Gal.4:15; ἐπᾶραι, Luk.6:20, Jhn.6:5; ἀνοῖξα, Act.9:40; id, of restoring sight, Mat.20:33, Jhn.9:10, al; ἐν ῥιπῇ ὀφθαλμοῦ, 1Co.15:52; by anthropom, of God, Heb.4:13, 1Pe.3:12; pleonastically (cf. Thackeray, Gr., 42f.), εἶδον οἱ ὀ. μοθ, Luk.2:30 (similarly, ib. 4:20 10:23, Jhn.12:40, 1Co.2:9, 1Jn.1:1, Rev.1:7). Metaphorical (as otherwise in cl; see LS, see word); (a) of ethical qualities: ὀ. πονηρός (meton, for envy; cf. Heb. עַיִן רַע, Pro.28:22; cf. Sir.14:10 34:13), Mat.6:22, 23 Mrk.7:22, Luk.11:34; ἁπλοῦς, Mat.6:22, Luk.11:34; ἐπιθυμία (which see) ὀφθαλμῶν (cf. Ecc.4:8, Sir.14:9), 1Jn.2:16; ὀ. μεστοὶ μοιχαλἰδος, 2Pe.2:14; (b) of mental vision: Mat.13:15, Mrk.8:18, Luk.19:42, Jhn.12:40, Rom.11:8, Gal.3:1, Eph.1:18, al; ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς before genitive (on the absence of the art, seeBl, §46, 9.II; M, Pr., 81), Mat.21:42, Mrk.12:11. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ὀφθαλμός
Transliteration:
ophthalmos
Gloss:
eye
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Male
Definition:
ὀφθαλμός, ὁ, (ὄπωπ-α, ὀφ-θῆναι, see at {ὄψ} B) eye, used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] mostly in plural; ὀφθαλμοὶ δ᾽ ὡς εἰ κέρα ἕστασαν. ἀτρέμας ἐν βλεφάροισι [Refs 8th c.BC+]: the plural continued most common, but the dual also occurs, as in [Refs 5th c.BC+] before one's eyes, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὀφθαλμοῖσιν ἰδεῖν, ὁρᾶσθαι, etc,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; but ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖσιν ὁρᾶν, νοεῖν, to see before one's eyes,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔχειν ἐν ὀ. to have before one's eyes, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἐν ὀ. what is before one's eyes, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ἐν τοῖς ὀ. δὴ γελοῖον what was ridiculous to the eye, [Refs]; ἐπίπροσθε τῶν ὀ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; γενέσθαι τινὶ ἐξ ὀφθαλμῶν to get out of any one's sight, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατ᾽ ὀφθαλμοὺς λέγειν τινί to tell one to one's face, opposed to εἰς οὖς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τυράννου κατ᾽ ὀ. κατηγορεῖν to accuse him to his face, [Refs 5th c.BC+], by eye, [Refs]; eyes were painted on the bows of vessels, βλοσυροῖς κατὰ πρῷραν ὀφθαλμοῖς οἷον βλέπει [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; whence the joke in [Refs 5th c.BC+] 2) στέρησις ὀφθαλμῶν temporary loss of sight, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] II) in singular, the eye of a master or ruler, πάντα ἰδὼν Διὸς ὀ. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀκοίμητος ὀ, of God, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; so a king is called ὀ. οἴκων [Refs 4th c.BC+]; and in Persia ὀφθαλμὸς βασιλέως the king's eye was a confidential officer, through whom he beheld his kingdom and subjects, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare οὖς. III) the eye of heaven, ἑσπέρας ὀ, νυκτὸς ὀ, of the moon, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also οὐράνιος ὀ, of the sun, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] IV) the dearest, best, as the eye is the most precious part of the body, hence of men, ὀ. Σικελίας, στρατιᾶς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also, light, cheer, comfort, μέγας [γ᾽] ὀ. οἱ πατρὸς τάφοι [Refs 5th c.BC+] V) eye or bud of a plant or tree, [Refs 7th c.BC+] VI) a surgical bandage covering one or both eyes, [Refs 5th c.BC+] VII) Architecture texts, in dual, the disks forming the centres of the volutes of an Ionic capital, [Refs]
Strongs
Word:
ὀφθαλμός
Transliteration:
ophthalmós
Pronounciation:
of-thal-mos'
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Noun Masculine
Definition:
the eye (literally or figuratively); by implication, vision; figuratively, envy (from the jealous side-glance); eye, sight; from g3700 (ὀπτάνομαι)
of them
Strongs:
Lexicon:
αὐτός
Greek:
αὐτῶν
Transliteration:
autōn
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
he/she/it/self
Morphhology:
Personal pronoun Genitive Plural Masculine
Grammar:
a reference to recently mentioned male people or things that something belongs to
Source:
Identical in all sources
Additional:
their
Alternates:
Tyndale
Word:
αὐτός
Transliteration:
autos
Gloss:
it/s/he
Morphhology:
Greek Personal Pronoun (3rd person)
Definition:
αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). 1) Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art, see infr, iii); (1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc, αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ, Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al; in late Gk, sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); (2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl, §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al; αὐ, καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. 2) In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al; with ptcp. in genitive absol, Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl, §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff; Bl, §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. 3) ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ, the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ, ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al; τὰ αὐ, Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ, together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ, 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
αὐτός
Transliteration:
autos
Gloss:
it/s/he
Morphhology:
Greek Personal Pronoun (3rd person)
Definition:
αὐτός (Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc, the very one, the same. I) self, myself, thyself, etc, accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10), I.1) one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+] Latin Ipse dixit; so τίς οὗτος;— Αὐτός, i.e. Socrates, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀναβόησον Αὐτόν[Refs]the Master, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the result will show, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; especially αὐτὸ δείξει[Refs 5th c.BC+]; of things, the very, ὑπὸ λόφον αὐτόν, i.e. just, exactly under, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πρὸς αὐταῖς ταῖς θύραις close by the door, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτὸ τὸ δέον the very thing needed, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτὸ τὸ περίορθρον the point of dawn, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτὰ τὰ ἐναντία the very opposite, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even, οὔ μοι μέλει ἄλγος οὔτ᾽ αὐτῆς Ἑκάβης[Refs 8th c.BC+] —In these senses αὐτός in Prose either precedes both the _Article_ and substantive, or follows both, e.g. αὐτὸς ὁ υἱός or ὁ υἱὸς αὐτός. The Article is sometimes omitted with proper names, or Nouns denoting individuals, αὐτὸς Μένων[Refs 5th c.BC+] I.2) of oneself, of one's own accord, ἀλλά τις αὐ. ἴτω[Refs 8th c.BC+]; also, in person, τῶν πραγμάτων ὑμῖν. αὐτοῖς ἀντιληπτέον[Refs 4th c.BC+] I.3) by oneself or itself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αὐτὸς ἐγείναο παῖδ᾽, i.e. without a mother,[Refs 8th c.BC+]by himself, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i.e. among friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτὰ γὰρ ἔστιν ταῦτα these and no others, [Refs 5th c.BC+] himself alone, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αὐτὸς μόνος, see at {μόνος} II; αὐτὸς καθ᾽ αὑτόν, see at {ἑαυτοῦ}. I.4) in Philosophy, by or in itself, of an abstract concept or idea, δίκαιον αὐτό[Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently in this sense, attached to Nouns of all genders, οὐκ αὐτὸ δικαιοσύνην ἐπαινοῦντες ἀλλὰ τὰς ἀπ᾽ αὐτῆς εὐδοκιμήσεις[Refs 5th c.BC+]; more fully, εἰ αὐτὸ τοῦτο πατέρα ἠρώτων, ἆρα ὁ πατήρ ἐστι πατήρ τινος, ἢ ο; [Refs]; ἀδελφός, αὐτὸ τοῦτο ὅπερ ἔστιν the ideal, abstract brother, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; less frequently agreeing with the substantive, ἵνα αὐτὴ δικαιοσύνη πρὸς ἀδικίαν αὐτὴν κριθείη[Refs 5th c.BC+]its very self, [Refs] I.5) in dative with substantive, in one, together, ἀνόρουσεν αὐτῇ σὺν φόρμιγγι he sprang up lyre in hand, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αὐτῇ σὺν πήληκι κάρη helmet and all,[Refs 8th c.BC+] men and all, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτοῖσι συμμάχοισι allies and all, [Refs 5th c.BC+] I.6) added to ordinal Numbers, e.g. πέμπτος αὐτός himself the fifth, i. e. himself with four others, [NT+5th c.BC+] I.7) frequently coupled with οὗτος, τοῦτ᾽ αὐτό ἐστι τὸ ζητηθέν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ταῦτα ἥκω αὐτὰ ἵνα. [Refs 5th c.BC+] I.8) καὶ αὐτός himself too, [Refs 8th c.BC+] I.9) repeated in apodosi for emphasis, αὐτὸς ἐπαγγειλάμενος σώσειν. αὐτὸς ἀπώλεσεν[Refs 5th c.BC+] I.10) in connexion with the person. pronoun, ἐγὼν αὐτός[Refs 8th c.BC+]; followed by an enclitic pronoun, αὐτόν μιν[Refs 8th c.BC+] I.10.b) with person. pronoun omitted, αὐτός. ἧσθαι λιλαίομαι, for ἐγὼ αὐτός, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αὐτὸν ἐλέησον, for ἐμὲ αὐτόν,[Refs 8th c.BC+] is simply a strengthened form of ο; and so in Attic dialect, when σὲ αὐτόν, ἐμοὶ αὐτῷ, etc, are read divisim, they are emphatic, not reflexive; in this case αὐτός generally precedes the person. pronoun,[Refs 5th c.BC+] I.10.c) with the reflexive ἑαυτοῦ, αὑτοῦ, etc, to add force and definiteness, αὐτὸς καθ᾽ αὑτοῦ[Refs 4th c.BC+]; αὐτοὶ ὑφ᾽ αὑτῶν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; sometimes between the Article and reflexive pronoun, τοῖς αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ πήμασιν βαρύνεται[Refs 5th c.BC+] I.10.d) αὐτοῦ, αὐτῶν with possessive pronoun, πατρὸς κλέος ἠδ᾽ ἐμὸν αὐτοῦ[Refs 8th c.BC+]; τοῖς οἷσιν αὐτοῦ[Refs 8th c.BC+] I.10.e) αὐτὸς ἑαυτοῦ with comparative and superlative adjective, αὐτὸς ἑωυτοῦ ῥέει πολλῷ ὑποδεέστερος[Refs 5th c.BC+] I.11) αὐτός for ὁ αὐτός, the same, [Refs 8th c.BC+], and in later Prose, αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις[NT+2nd c.AD+] I.12) comparative αὐτότερος[Refs 5th c.BC+]: superlative αὐτότατος his very self, [Refs 5th c.BC+]. adverb, comparative αὐτοτέρως[Refs 2nd c.AD+] II) he, she, it, for the simple pronoun of 3 person, only in oblique cases (except in later Gk, [NT], and rarely first in a sentence, [NT+5th c.BC+]: rare in Epic dialect, [Refs 8th c.BC+], and mostly emphatic,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; so in Trag, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in Prose, to recall a Noun used earlier in the sentence, ἐγὼ μὲν οὖν βασιλέα. οὐκ οἶδα ὅ τι δεῖ αὐτὸν ὀμόσαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]; after a Relative, ὅς κε θεοῖς ἐπιπείθηται. ἔκλυον αὐτοῦ[Refs 8th c.BC+]; especially where a second Verb requires a change of case in the pronoun, οἳ ἂν ἐξελεγχθῶσι. ὡς προδότας αὐτοὺς ὄντας τιμωρηθῆναι[Refs 5th c.BC+]; later, pleonastically after a Relative, ὧν ὁ μὲν αὐτῶν[NT+5th c.BC+] III) with Article ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό, and Attic dialect contraction αὑτός, αὑτή, ταὐτό and ταὐτόν (as required by the metre,[Refs 5th c.BC+] plural neuter ταὐτ; Ionic dialect ὡυτός, τὠυτό:—the very one, the same, rare in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: with dative, to denote sameness or agreement, especially in Prose, τὠυτὸ ἂν ὑμῖν ἐπρήσσομεν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ αὐτὸς τῷ λίθῳ the same as the stone, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν ταὐτῷ εἶναί τινι to be in the place with, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; προσίεσθαί τινα ἐς ταὐτὸ ἑαυτῷ to have a person meet one,[Refs 5th c.BC+]face to face, [Refs 4th c.AD+] III.2) in later Greek, the said, the above-named, Ἡρώδης ὁ αὐ.[Refs 3rd c.BC+] IV) Adverbial phrases: IV.1) αὐτὸ μόνον simply, merely, [Refs 1st c.AD+] IV.2) αὐτό as adverb, ={ἄρτι}, [Refs] IV.3) αὐτὸ τοῦτο as adverb, [NT+2nd c.BC+] IV.4) with Preps, ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό added together, making a total, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό together, at the same time,[NT], etc; but κατ᾽ αὐτό just then, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] V) In Compos: V.1) of or by oneself, self-, as in αὐτοδίδακτος, αὐτογνώμων, αὐτόματος: and so, independently, as in αὐτοκράτωρ, αὐτόνομος. V.2) hence, as a second self, very, bodily, as with proper names, Αὐτοθαΐς. V.3) in the abstract, the ideal, see above[Refs] V.4) precisely, as in αὐτόδεκα. V.5) rarely with reflexive sense of ἀλλήλων, as in αὐτοκτονέω. V.6) in one piece with, together with, as in αὐτόκωπος, αὐτοχείλης, αὐτόπρεμνος, αὐτόρριζος. V.7) by itself: hence, only, as in αὐτόξυλος, αὐτόποκος.—For αὐτοῦ, αὐτῶς, etc, see the respective Arts.
Strongs
Word:
αὐτός
Transliteration:
autós
Pronounciation:
ow-tos'
Language:
Greek
Definition:
the reflexive pronoun self, used (alone or in the comparative g1438 (ἑαυτοῦ)) of the third person , and (with the proper personal pronoun) of the other persons; her, it(-self), one, the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy- )self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at, - by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man), those, together, very, which; from the particle (perhaps akin to the base of g109 (ἀήρ) through the idea of a baffling wind) (backward)
they have closed;
Strongs:
Lexicon:
καμμύω
Greek:
ἐκάμμυσαν·
Transliteration:
ekammusan
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
to close
Morphhology:
Verb Aorist Active Indicative 3rd Plural
Grammar:
an ACTION that happened - by people or things being discussed
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
καμμύω
Transliteration:
kammuō
Gloss:
to close
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
καμμύω (syncopated form of καταμύω, used by Ep. and κοινή writers; Rutherford, NPhr., 426 f.) [in LXX: Isa.6:10 (שָׁעַע hi.) Isa.29:10 33:15 (עָצַם), La 3:44 AR*;] to shut the eyes: τ. ὀφθαλμούς, Mat.13:15, Act.28:27 (Isa, l.with). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
καμμύω
Transliteration:
kammuō
Gloss:
to close
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
καμμύω, Epic dialect for καταμύω, variant in [Refs]: also in later Gr, τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ἐκάμμυσαν [LXX+2nd c.BC+]: perfect κεκάμμυκα [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
καμμύω
Transliteration:
kammýō
Pronounciation:
kam-moo'-o
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Verb
otherwise
Strongs:
Lexicon:
μήποτε+πότε
Greek:
μήποτε
Transliteration:
mēpote
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
lest+when
Morphhology:
Negative Particle Negative Negative
Grammar:
introducing a negative
Source:
Identical in all sources
Additional:
not + lest
Alternates:
Tyndale
Word:
μή
Transliteration:
mē
Gloss:
not
Morphhology:
Greek Particle Neuter
Definition:
μή, subjective negative particle, used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic, μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין,אַיִן,אַל] I. As a neg. adv, not; 1) with ref. to thought or opinion: Jhn.3:18, Tit.1:11, 2Pe.1:9. 2) In delib. questions, with subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mrk.12:14, Rom.3:8. 3) In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mat.10:14, Mrk.6:11 12:19, Luk.9:5, Jhn.6:50, Rom.11:25, al. 4) C. inf. (see M, Pr., 234f, 239, 255), (a) after verbs of saying, etc: Mat.2:12 5:34, Mrk.12:18, Act.15:38, Rom.2:21, al; (b) with artic. inf: after a prep, Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:5, Act.7:19, 1Co.10:6, al; without a prep, Rom.14:13, 2Co.2:1, 13 1Th 4:6; (with) in sentences expressing consequence, after ὥστε: Mat.8:28, Mrk.3:20, 1Co.1:7, 2Co.3:7, al. 5) C. ptcp. (see M, Pr., 231f, 239), in hypothetical references to persons of a certain character or description: Mat.10:28 12:30, Luk.6:49, Jhn.3:18, Rom.4:5, 1Co.7:38, 1Jn.3:10, al; where the person or thing being definite, the denial is a matter of opinion: Jhn.6:64, 1Co.1:28 4:7, 18, 2Co.5:21, al; where the ptcp. has a concessive, causal or conditional force, if, though, because not: Mat.18:25, Luk.2:45, Jhn.7:49, Act.9:26, Rom.2:14 5:13, 2Co.3:14, Gal.6:9, Ju 5; where the ptcp. has a descriptive force (being such as), not: Act.9:9, Rom.1:28, 1Co.10:33, Gal.4:8, Heb.12:27, al. 6) μή prohibitive, in indep. sentences, (a) with subjc. praes, 1 of person(s) pl: Gal.5:26 6:9, 1Th.5:6, 1Jn.3:18; (b) with imperat. praes, usually where one is bidden to desist from what has already begun (cf. M, Pr., 122ff.): Mat.7:1, Mrk.5:36, Luk.6:30, Jhn.2:16 5:45, Act.10:15, Rom.11:18, Jas.2:1, Rev.5:5, al; (with) forbidding that which is still future: with imperat. aor, 3 of person(s), Mat.24:18, Mrk.13:15, Luk.17:31, al; with subjc. aor, 2 of person(s), Mat.3:9 10:26, Mrk.5:7, Luk.6:29, Jhn.3:7, Rom.10:6, al; (d) with optative, in wishes: 2Ti.4:16 (LXX); μὴ γένοιτο (see M, Pr., 194; Bl, §66, 1), Luk.20:16, Rom.3:3, al; μή τις, Mrk.13:5, al. II. As a conj, 1) after verbs of fearing, caution, etc, that, lest, perhaps (M, Pr., 192f.): with subjc. praes, Heb.12:15; with subjc. aor, Mat.24:4, Mrk.13:5, Luk.21:8, Act.13:40, Gal.5:15, al; ὅρα μή (see M, Pr., 124, 178), elliptically, Rev.19:10 22:9; with indic, fut. (M, Pr., l.with), Col.2:8. 2) in order that not: with subjc. aor, Mrk.13:36, 2Co.8:20 12:6. III. Interrogative, in hesitant questions (M, Pr., 170), or where a negative answer is expected: Mat.7:9, 10, Mrk.2:19, Jhn.3:4, Rom.3:3 10:18, 19, 1Co.1:13, al; μή τις, Luk.22:35, al; before οὐ (Rom.10:17, al. in Pl.), expecting an affirm, ans; οὐ μή, Luk.18:7, Jhn.18:11. IV. οὐ μή as emphatic negation (cf. M, Pr., 188, 190ff; Bl. §64, 5), not at all, by no means: with indic, fut, Mat.16:22, Jhn.6:35, Heb.10:17, al; with subjc. aor, Mat.24:2, Mrk.13:2, Luk.6:37, Jhn.13:8, 1Co.8:13, al. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
μή
Transliteration:
mē
Gloss:
not
Morphhology:
Greek Particle Neuter
Definition:
μή, Elean μά [ᾱ] [Refs 6th c.BC+]. (Cf. Sanskrit mā´, Armenian mi [from I.-[Refs 5th c.BC+] mē´], negative used in prohibitions):—not, the negative of the will and thought, as οὐ of fact and statement; μή rejects, οὐ denies; μή is relative, οὐ absolute; μή subjective, οὐ objective. (A few examples of μηδέ and μηδείς have been included.) A) in INDEPENDENT sentences, used in expressions of will or wish, command, entreaty, warning, A.1) with present imperative, 2 person, μή μ᾽ ἐρέθιζε [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely with aorist imperative, μὴ. ἔνθεο τιμῇ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Attic dialect, μὴ ψεῦσον, ὦ Ζεῦ, τῆς. ἐλπίδος [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect imperative [Refs 8th c.BC+] person when perfect = present, μὴ κεκράγετε [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.2) with subjunctive (usually [Refs], in prohibitions, μὴ δή με. ἐάσῃς [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μή τοί με κρύψῃς τοῦτο[Refs 5th c.BC+]: coupled with present imperative, μὴ βοηθήσητε τῷ πεπονθότι δεινά, μὴ εὐορκεῖτε [Refs 8th c.BC+] person present subjunctive, μὴ κάμνῃς [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with the hortative subjunctive used to supply the [Refs] person of the imperative, present μὴ ἴομεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist μὴ πάθωμεν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: rarely with 1st pers. singular, μή σε. κιχείω [Refs 8th c.BC+] (anapaest meter). A.2.b) with present or aorist subjunctive in a warning or statement of fear, μὴ. γένησθε take care you do not become, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μὴ. ὑφαίνῃσιν I fear. may prove to be weaving, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: in Attic dialect Prose, to make a polite suggestion of apprehension or hesitation, perhaps, μὴ ἀγροικότερον ᾖ τὸ ἀληθὲς εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in later Greek the indicative is found, μὴ ἡ ἔννοια ἡμῶν. ἀντιλαμβάνεται [Refs 5th c.AD+] A.3) with future indicative, a uncertain usage (νεμεσήσετ᾽ is subjunctive in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μὴ βουλήσεσθε (Papyrus βούλη[σθ]ε) [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.4) with past tenses of indicative to express an unfulfilled wish, μὴ ὄφελες λίσσεσθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.5) with optative to express a negative wish, with present, ἃ μὴ κραίνοι τύχη [Refs 4th c.BC+]: more frequently with aorist, μὴ σέ γ᾽ ἐν ἀμφιάλῳ Ἰθάκῃ βασιλῆα Κρονίων ποιήσειεν [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.6) in oaths and asseverations, ἴστω Ζεὺς, μὴ μὲν τοῖς ἵπποισιν ἀνὴρ ἐποχήσεται ἄλλος [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.7) with infinitive, when used as imperative, μὴ δή μοι ἀπόπροθεν ἰσχέμεν ἵππους [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.8) frequently without a Verb, εἰ χρή, θανοῦμαι. Answ. μὴ σύ γε (i.e. θάνῃς) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἄπελθε νῦν. Answ. μὴ (i.e. γενέσθω) ἀλλά nay but, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in curt expressions, μὴ τριβὰς ἔτι (i.e. ποιεῖσθε) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μή μοι σύ none of that to me! [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μή μοι πρόφασιν no excuses! [Refs 5th c.BC+] B) in DEPENDENT clauses: B.1) with Final Conjs, ἵνα μή [Refs 8th c.BC+], that so, ὅπως ἂν. μηδέ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; but B.1.b) μή alone, ={ἵνα μή}, lest, ἀπόστιχε μή τινοήσῃ Ἥρη [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future indicative and aorist subjunctive in consecutive clauses, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2) in the protasis of conditional sentences, see at {εἰ} (for the exceptions see at {οὐ}), and with temporal conjunctions used conditionally, see at {ἐπειδάν, ὅταν, ὅτε}, etc. B.2.b) ὅτι μή except, ὅτι μὴ Χῖοι μοῦνοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὅσα μὴ ἀποβαίνοντες provided only that they did not disembark, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.3) in later Gr, with causal Conjs, ὁ μὴ πιστεύων ἤδη κέκριται, ὅτι μὴ πεπίστευκεν [NT+2nd c.AD+] that, ὅτι μὴ ἐστὶν ἐπίπεδος οὕτως ἂν καταμάθοιμεν [Refs 2nd c.AD+] B.4) in relative clauses, which imply a condition or generality, ὃς δὲ μὴ εἶδέ κω τὴν κανναβίδα whoever, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὃ μὴ κελεύσει (perhaps κελεύσαι) Ζεύς such a thing as, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; λέγονθ᾽ ἃ μὴ δεῖ such things as one ought not, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: frequently with subjunctive, ᾧ μὴ ἄλλοι ἀοσσητῆρες ἔωσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.5) with infinitive, B.5.a) regularlyfrom Homer on, except after Verbs of saying and thinking (but see below c): after ὥστε or ὡς, ὥστε μὴ φρονεῖν [Refs 4th c.BC+]: always when the infinitive takes the Article, τὸ μὴ προμαθεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.5.b) by an apparent pleonasm after Verbs of negative result signifying to forbid, deny, and the like, ὁ δ᾽ ἀναίνετο μηδὲν ἑλέσθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+] (μηδέν); ἀντιλέγειν [Refs 5th c.BC+] (μηδέ); ἀπαγορεύειν [Refs 5th c.BC+] (μηδέ); ἀποτρέπεσθαι [Refs] (μηδέν); ἀρνεῖσθαι, ἔξαρνος εἶναι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; παύειν (where the participle is more frequently) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in these cases the Article frequently precedes μή, τὸ δὲ μὴ λεηλατῆσαι. ἔσχε τόδε [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐξομῇ τὸ μὴ εἰδένα; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἴργειν τὸ μή. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐμποδὼν γίγνεσθαι τοῦ μή. [Refs] B.5.c) after Verbs of saying and thinking which involve an action of will, as in those signifying to swear, aver, believe, and the like; so after ὄμνυμι, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: occasionally with other Verbs, φημί [Refs 5th c.BC+]; λέγω, προλέγω, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πάντες ἐροῦσι μή. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; νομίζω[Refs 5th c.BC+]: very frequently in later Gr, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.6) with the participle, when it can be resolved into a conditional clause, μὴ ἐνείκας, = {εἰ μὴ ἤνεικε}, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μὴ θέλων, ={εἰ μὴ θέλεις}, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; μὴ δολώσαντος θεοῦ, ={εἰ μὴ ἐδόλωσε}, [Refs]; μὴ δρῶν, ={εἰ μὴ δρῴην}, [Refs 5th c.BC+], = ut qui nihil sciam, [Refs]; τίς πρὸς ἀνδρὸς μὴ βλέποντος ἄρκεσι; one who sees not, [Refs]: in this signification frequently with the Article, ὁ μὴ λεύσσων [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with causal significance, μὴ παρὼν θαυμάζεται [Refs 5th c.BC+]: very frequently in later Greek, [Refs 1st c.AD+]: occasionally after Verbs of knowing and showing, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.7) with Substantives, adjectives, and adverbs used generically, with or without Article, τὰ μὴ δίκαια [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ μὴ 'μπειρία, ={τὸ μὴ ἔχειν ἐμπειρίαν}, want of experience, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δῆμον καὶ μὴ δῆμον[Refs 4th c.BC+] B.8) after Verbs expressing fear or apprehension (compare μὴ οὐ): B.8.a) when the thing feared is future, mostly with subjunctive: with present subjunctive, δεινῶς ἀθυμῶ μὴ βλέπων ὁ μάντις ᾖ shall proveto be, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: more frequently with aorist, δείδοικα. μή σε παρείπῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]: with perfect, shall prove to have been, δέδοικα μὴ περαιτέρω πεπραγμέν᾽ ᾖ μοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: less frequently with future indicative, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with optative according to the sequence of moods and tenses: present optative, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with future optative in oratio obliqua, [Refs 5th c.BC+]vect.4.41. B.8.b) when the action is present or past, the indicative is used, εἰσόρα μὴ σκῆψιν οὐκ οὖσαν τίθης [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.8.c) with indicative and subjunctive in consecutive clauses, [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) in QUESTIONS: C.I) direct questions, C.I.1) with indicative, where aneg. answer is anticipated (but more generally in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μή σοι δοκοῦμεν; [Refs 5th c.BC+] (μηδέ) follows οὐ, see at {οὐ μή}. C.I.1.b) in other questions, τί μὴ ποιήσ; what am I not to do? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τί μ; why not? [Refs]; compare μήν C.I.2) with subjunctive, when the speaker deliberates about a negative action, μὴ οὕτω φῶμε; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοιοῦτος μὴ δῷ δίκη; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; πῶς μὴ φῶμε; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; how can a man help being excited when he speaks? [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.II) indirect questions, frequently with Verbs implying fear and apprehension [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also σκοπεῖσθαι πῶς ἂν μή. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; later in simple indirect questions, ἐπυνθάνετο μὴ ἔγνω [Refs 2nd c.AD+] C.II.2) in questions introduced by εἰ, ἤρετό με. εἰ μὴ μέμνημαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἴτε. εἴτε μή, εἰ. ἢ οὔ, εἰ. ἢ μή without difference of meaning between μή and οὐ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] D) POSITION of μή. When the negative extends its power over the whole clause, μή properly precedes the Verb. When its force is limited to single words, it precedes those words. But Poets sometimes put μή after the Verb, ὄλοιο μή πω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φράσῃς. μὴ πέρα[Refs] D.2) μή is sometimes repeated, μή, μή καλέσῃς [Refs 5th c.BC+] E) PROSODY: in Trag. μή may be joined by synizesis with a following ει or ου, μὴ οὐ, μὴ εἰδέναι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: initial ε after μή is cut off by aphaeresis, μὴ 'πὁθουν [Refs] followed by α is sometimes written μἀ. (see. μὴ ἀλλά, etc.); sometimes separately, μὴ ἀδικεῖν [Refs 4th c.BC+] F) μή in COMPOSITION (joined with other words), as μὴ ἀλλά, μὴ γάρ, μὴ οὐ, μὴ ὅπως or ὅτι, μή ποτε, etc, will be found in alphabetical order.
Strongs
Word:
μή
Transliteration:
mḗ
Pronounciation:
may
Language:
Greek
Definition:
(adverb) not, (conjunction) lest; also (as an interrogative implying a negative answer (whereas g3756 (οὐ) expects an affirmative one)) whether; any but (that), X forbear, + God forbid, + lack, lest, neither, never, no (X wise in), none, nor, (can-)not, nothing, that not, un(-taken), without; a primary particle of qualified negation (whereas g3756 (οὐ) expresses an absolute denial)
otherwise
Strongs:
Lexicon:
μήποτε+πότε
Greek:
μήποτε
Transliteration:
mēpote
Context:
Joined with previous word
Gloss:
lest+when
Morphhology:
Particle or Disjunctive Particle
Grammar:
introducing an alternative
Source:
Identical in all sources
Additional:
not + lest
Alternates:
Tyndale
Word:
ποτέ
Transliteration:
pote
Gloss:
once/when
Morphhology:
Greek Particle
Definition:
ποτέ enclitic particle, 1) once, formerly, sometime: of the past, Jhn.9:13 Rom.7:9 11:30, Gal.1:13, 23 2:6 (Lft, in l), Eph.2:2-3, 11 2:13 5:8, Col.1:21 3:7, 1Th.2:5, Tit.3:3, Phm 11, 1Pe.2:10 3:5 3:20; ἤδη ποτέ, now at length, Php.4:10; of the fut, Luk.22:32; εἴ πως ἤδη ποτέ, if sometime soon at length, Rom.1:10. 2) ever: after a neg, Eph.5:29, 2Pe.1:10 1:21; in a question, τίς π, 1Co.9:7, Heb.1:5, 13. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ποτέ
Transliteration:
pote
Gloss:
once/when
Morphhology:
Greek Particle
Definition:
Included with: πότε, Ionic dialect κότε, Doric dialect πόκα [Refs 3rd c.BC+]:—interrogative Particle used in direct and indirect questions, when? at what time? [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πότ᾽ ἆρ; ={πότε} with ἆρα [Refs 5th c.BC+] II) indefinite ποτε (Attic dialect, also [Refs 4th c.BC+], Ionic dialect κοτε, Doric dialect ποκα, Aeolic dialect ποτα [Refs 7th c.BC+] II.1) at some time or other, at some time, τάχ᾽ ἄν ποτε θυμὸν ὀλέσσῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; π. καὶ ἄλλοτε at certain other times, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.2) in hypothetical clauses, questions, etc, at any time, ever, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare εἴ ποτε: also with relatives (compare δήποτε), Ζεὺς ὅστις ποτ᾽ ἐστίν [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὅποι ποτέ, ὅπου π, etc, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; after πω, πη, see at {πώποτε, πήποκα}: very frequently with negatives, οὔτε ποτ᾽. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare οὔποτε, μήποτε, οὐδέποτε, μηδέποτε, οὐπώποτε, μηπώποτε. II.3) in correlative clauses it stands first, with accent, ποτὲ μὲν, ποτὲ δὲ. at one time, at another, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ποτὲ δὲ, without any preceding Part, [Refs 4th c.BC+] III) of some unknown point of time, III.1) in reference to the past, once, ὅν ποτ᾽ Ἀθήνη θρέψε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; especially in telling a story, once upon a time, οὕτω ποτ᾽ ἦν μῦς καὶ γαλῆ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with historic present, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with a substantive, εἰς τήν π. φιλίαν [Refs 5th c.BC+] III.1.b) at length, μόγις δή κοτε εἶπε [Refs 5th c.BC+] III.2) in reference to the future, at some time, καί π. τοι. παρέσσεται. δῶρα [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also to denote earnest expectation, at length, εὔχεταί π. οἶκον ἰδεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+]dimitte tandem aliquando, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὀψέ π. [Refs 4th c.AD+] III.3) with intensive force, in questions, τίς ποτ; who in the world? τίνες ποτ᾽ ἐστ; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τί ποτ᾽ ἐστὶ τοῦτο τὸ πάθος what it can possibly be, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to strengthen ἀεί, ἀεί ποτε from all time, always in the past, ἀεί ποτε ζῇ ταῦτα [Refs 5th c.BC+]
Strongs
Word:
ποτέ
Transliteration:
poté
Pronounciation:
pot-eh'
Language:
Greek
they may see
Strongs:
Lexicon:
εἴδω
Greek:
ἴδωσιν
Transliteration:
idōsin
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
to perceive
Morphhology:
Verb 2nd Aorist Active Subjunctive 3rd Plural
Grammar:
an ACTION that maybe happened - by people or things being discussed
Source:
Identical in all sources
Additional:
to perceive, see
Tyndale
Word:
εἴδω
Transliteration:
eidō
Gloss:
to perceive: see
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
οἶδα, (from same root as εἶδον, which see), [in LXX chiefly for ידע;] pf. with present meaning (plpf. as impf; on irregular tense-forms, see App.), to have seen or perceived, hence, to know, have knowledge of: with accusative of thing(s), Mat.25:13, Mrk.10:19, Jhn.10:4, Rom.7:7, al; with accusative of person(s), Mat.26:72, Jhn.1:31, Act.3:16, al; τ. θεόν, 1Th.4:5, Tit.1:16, al; with accusative and inf, Luk.4:41, al; before ὅτι, Mat.9:6, Luk.20:21, Jhn.3:2, Rom.2:2 11:2, al; before quaest. indir, Mat.26:70, Jhn.9:21, Eph.1:18, al; with inf, to know how (cl.), Mat.7:11, Luk.11:13, Php.4:12, 1Th.4:4, al; in unique sense of respect, appreciate: 1Th.5:12 (but see also ICC on 1Th.4:4). SYN.: see: γινώσκω. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
εἴδω
Transliteration:
eidō
Gloss:
to perceive: see
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
εἴδω, no active present in use, ὁράω being used:—middle, see.below [Refs 4th c.BC+]: aorist 2 εἶδον always in sense of see (so in present and aorist 1 middle, to be seen, i.e. seem): but perfect οἶδα, in present sense, know. (With ἔ-ϝιδον, compare (ϝ) είδομαι, (ϝ) εῖδος, Latin videre; with (ϝ) οῖδα, cf. Sanskrit véda, Gothic wait, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] wát 'know'.) A) aorist 2 εἶδον (late εἶδα [Refs 5th c.AD+]aorist to ὁράω, Epic dialect ἴδον, iterative ἴδεσκε [Refs 8th c.BC+], late Aeolic dialect εὔιδον [Refs]; imperative ἴδε (in Attic dialect written as adverb ἰδέ, behold! Hdn.Gr.2.23), ἴδετ; subjunctive ἴδω, Epic dialect ἴδωμι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; optative ἴδοιμ; infinitive ἰδεῖν, Epic dialect ἰδέει; participle ἰδών: hence, future ἰδησῶ [Refs 3rd c.BC+] —middle, aorist 2 εἰδόμην, Epic dialect ἰδόμην, in same sense, poetry, Ionic dialect, and later Prose (with genitive, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; imperative ἰδοῦ (frequently written as adverb ἰδού, ={ἰδέ}); subjunctive ἴδωμα; optative ἰδοίμη; infinitive ἰδέσθα; participle ἰδόμενος [Refs 5th c.BC+] 1) see, perceive, behold, ὀφθαλμοῖσι or ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖσι ἰδέσθαι see before the eyes, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἄγε, πειρήσομαι ἠδὲ ἴδωμαι well, I will try and see, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; mark, observe, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: frequently in infinitive after substantive or adjective, θαῦμα ἰδέσθαι a marvel to behold, [Refs 8th c.BC+] 1.b) see a person, i.e. meet him, speak with him, [Refs 5th c.BC+] 1.c) see, i.e. experience, νόστιμον ἦμαρ ἰδέσθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀλόχου κουριδίης. οὔ τι χάριν ἴδε he saw (i.e. enjoyed) not the favour of his wedded wife, [Refs 8th c.BC+] 2) look, ἰδεῖν ἐς. look at or towards, [Refs]; πρός. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι look him in the face, [Refs 8th c.BC+] adverb or adjective, ὑπόδρα ἰδών looking askance, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀχρεῖον ἰδών looking helpless, [Refs]; κέρδος ἰδεῖν look to gain, [Refs 4th c.BC+] 3) see mentally, perceive, ἰδέσθαι ἐν φρεσίν 'to see in his mind's eye', [Refs 8th c.BC+] 3.b) examine, investigate, [Refs]; consider, ἴδωμεν τί λέγομεν [Refs] II) middle, present εἴδομαι, Epic dialect ἐείδεται [Refs 3rd c.BC+], participle ἐειδόμενος [Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist εἰσάμην, Epic dialect participle ἐεισάμενος [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—only Epic dialect and Lyric poetry, to be seen, appear, εἴδεται ἄστρα they are visible, appear,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; perhaps also οὔ πῃ χροὸς εἴσατο none of the skin was visible, [Refs 8th c.BC+] II.2) with infinitive, appear or seem to be, τὸ δέ τοι κὴρ εἴδεται εἶναι [Refs 8th c.BC+]: with infinitive omitted, οἱ τό γε κέρδιον εἴσατο θυμῷ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also, look like or make a show of, εἴσατ᾽ ἴμεν ἐς Λῆμνον he made a show of going to Lemnos, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἴσατο δ᾽ ὡς ὅτε ῥινόν it had the look as of a shield, [Refs] II.3) strictly middle, with dative, εἴσατο φθογγὴν Πολίτῃ she made herself like Polites in voice, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: especially in participle, like, εἰδομένη κήρυκι [Refs 8th c.BC+] B) perfect, οἶδα I know, used as present: pluperfect ᾔδεα (see. below), I knew, used as imperfect:—perfect οἶδα, Aeolic dialect ὄϊδα [Refs 7th c.BC+]; 2nd pers. singular οἶδας once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἶσθα elsewhere in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Attic dialect, etc; in Comedy texts also sometimes οἶσθας [Refs 5th c.BC+]; plural, ἴσμεν, Epic dialect, Aeolic dialect, and Doric dialect ἴδμεν, also Ionic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἴστε, ἴσασι [ῐς- [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἴδαμεν [Refs 5th c.BC+] were formed Doric dialect 1st pers. singular ἴσᾱμι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἴσατι [Refs]; 1st pers. plural ἴσᾰμεν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect 3rd.pers. plural subjunctive ἴθθαντι [Refs]; infinitive ϝισάμην[Refs]; participle ἴσας [Refs 5th c.BC+]subjunctive εἰδῶ (εἰδέω, ἰδέω, [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect 3rd.pers. plural εἰδέωσι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic dialect also εἴδω [Refs 8th c.BC+], 1st pers. plural εἰδεῖμεν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: infinitive εἰδέναι, Epic dialect ἴδμεναι, ἴδμεν, also ἰδέμεν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: participle εἰδώς, εἰδυῖα, Epic dialect also ἰδυῖα, Elean ϝειζώς [Refs]:—pluperfect ᾔδεα [Refs 8th c.BC+], contraction ᾔδη [Refs 8th c.BC+] frequently in codices, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also later Attic dialect, accusative to [Refs 5th c.BC+] (variant -εις, - ει), [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Attic dialect also 1st pers. singular ᾔδειν [Refs 4th c.BC+], 2nd pers. singular ᾔδεις [Refs 5th c.BC+], Ionic dialect ᾐδέατε [LXX+6th c.BC+]; late Epic dialect ᾔδειν, ἠείδειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic dialect 3rd.pers. plural ἴσαν [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—future, in this sense, εἴσομαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; infinitive εἰδησέμεν [Refs 8th c.BC+] —The aorist and perfect are usually supplied by γιγνώσκ; aorist 1 infinitive εἰδῆσαι is found in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural subjunctive εἰδήσωσιν Herzog Koische Forschungen No.[Refs 2nd c.BC+]:—know, have knowledge of, be acquainted with, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; νοήματα, μήδεα οἶδε, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πρῶτος ὧν ἡμεῖς ἴδμεν the first we know of, [Refs 5th c.BC+] know well, be assured of this, [Refs 8th c.BC+] adjective, to express character or disposition, ἄγρια οἶδε has fierceness in his heart, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀθεμίστια ᾔδη had law lessness in his heart, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἴ μοι ἤπια εἰδείη if he were kindly disposed towards me, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: with genitive, ὃς σάφα θυμῷ εἰδείη τεράων [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τόξων ἐῢ εἰδώς cunning with the bow,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; χάριν εἰδέναι τινί acknowledge a debt to another, thank him,[Refs 5th c.BC+] be Zeus my witness, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἴττω Ἡρακλῆς etc, [Refs 5th c.BC+]participle εἰδώς, absolutely, one who knows, one acquainted with the fact, ἰδυίῃ πάντ᾽ ἀγορεύω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also ἰδυίῃσι πραπίδεσσι with knowing mind, [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.2) with infinitive, know how to do, οἶδ᾽ ἐπὶ δεξιά, οἶδ᾽ ἐπ᾽ ἀριστερὰ νωμῆσαι βῶν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also, to be in a condition, be able, have the power, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of drugs, ὅσα λεπτύνειν οἶδε [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; of a festival, οἶδε ἐκπέμπουσα δάκνειν Chor.p.124 [Refs 5th c.BC+]; learn, ἵν᾽ εἰδῇ μὴ 'πὶ τοῖς ἐμοῖς κακοῖς ὑψηλὸς εἶναι [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.3) with participle, to know that such and such is the fact, the participle being in nominative when it is a predicate of the Subject of the Verb, ἴσθι μοι δώσων know that thou wilt give, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in accusative when it is predicate of the Object, τοὺς φιλτάτους γὰρ οἶδα νῷν ὄντας πικρούς [Refs 5th c.BC+]participle omitted, γῆν αὐτὰ οἶδεν ἀμφότερα (i.e. ὄντα) [Refs 4th c.AD+] B.4) less frequently c.accusative et infinitive, πλήθους. ἂν σάφ᾽ ἴσθ᾽ ἕκατι βάρβαρον ναυσὶν κρατῆσαι [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.5) with accusative followed by ὡς, ὅτι, etc, οἶδα κἀμαυτὴν ὅτι ἀλγῶ [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.6) οὐκ οἶδ᾽ εἰ. I know not whether, to express disbelief or doubt, sometimes with ἄν transposed, οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ἂν εἰ πείσαιμί σε [Refs 5th c.BC+] perhaps no other, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.7) in similar ellipses with other Conjunctions, οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ὅπως I know not how, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.8) οἶδα, ἴσθι are frequently parenthetic, οἶδ᾽ ἐγώ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also οἶδ᾽ ὅτι, οἶσθ᾽ ὅτι, ἴσθ᾽ ὅτι, πάρειμι δ᾽ ἄκων οὐχ ἑκοῦσιν, οἶδ᾽ ὅτι (i.e. πάρειμι) I know it well, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἶδ᾽ ὅτι, frequently in [Refs 5th c.BC+] —οἶσθ᾽ ὅ, οἶσθ᾽ ὡς, with _imperative_, are common in Trag. and Comedy texts, οἶσθ᾽ οὖν ὃ δρᾶσον; do—thou know'st what, i.e. make haste and do, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἶσθ᾽ ὡς πόησο; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also οἶσθ᾽. ὡς νῦν μὴ σφαλῇ; [Refs]; οἶσθα νῦν ἅ μοι γενέσθ; [Refs 5th c.BC+]future, οἶσθ᾽ οὖν ὃ δράσεις (nisileg. δρᾶσον); [Refs]
Strongs > g1492
Word:
εἴδω
Transliteration:
eídō
Pronounciation:
i'-do
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Verb
Definition:
used only in certain past tenses, the others being borrowed from the equivalent g3700 (ὀπτάνομαι) and g3708 (ὁράω); properly, to see (literally or figuratively); by implication, (in the perfect tense only) to know; be aware, behold, X can (+ not tell), consider, (have) know(-ledge), look (on), perceive, see, be sure, tell, understand, wish, wot; a primary verb
with the
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ὁ
Greek:
τοῖς
Transliteration:
tois
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Definite article Dative Plural Masculine
Grammar:
specific male people or things that something is done for‚ or in relation to
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. I. As demonstr. pron. 1) As frequently in Hom, absol, he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). 2) Distributive, ὁ μὲν. ὁ δέ, the one. the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl, Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al; οἱ μὲν. ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀. ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. 3) In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, 1) to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc, to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. 2) To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc; with poss. pron, ἐμός, σός, etc; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj, both with art, ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. 3) To Other parts of speech used as substantives; (a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc; (b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc; (with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp, every one who, etc; (d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; (e) infinitives: nom, τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf, see Bl, §71). 4) In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. 5) To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol, in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. 6) To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is, when thus written, A) demonstrative Pronoun. B ) in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article. C ) in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive singular is in many places τῶ, accusative plural τώς, but Cretan dialect, etc, τόνς [Refs]; in Lesbian Aeolic dialect the accusative plural forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, [Refs]; dative plural τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, see above), [Refs]; ταῖσι as demonstrative, [Refs 7th c.BC+] Poets also used the Ionic dialect and _Epic dialect_ forms τοῖσι, ταῖσ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν, τοὶ δέ, for οἱ μέν, οἱ δέ, not only in Lyric poetry, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but even in a trimeter, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {ὅ}; τὼ πόλεε Foed. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in [Refs 4th c.AD+] functions as genitive dual feminine, μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν [Refs 4th c.BC+] —in Elean and _Boeotian dialect_ ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, ={ὅδε}, ἥδε, τόδε, _nominative_ _plural_ _masculine_ τυΐ the following men, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] cf. Sanskrit demonstrative pronoun sa, sā, Gothic sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Latin accusative sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from *τόδ] cf. Sanskrit tat (tad), Latin is-tud, Gothic pata: —with τοί cf. Sanskrit te, Lithuanian tĩe, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] pá, etc:—with τάων cf. Sanskrit tāsām, Latin is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (which see) is different.) A) ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in [Refs 8th c.BC+] the commonest sense: frequently also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in Trag. (mostly in Lyric poetry, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τῶν γάρ, τῆς γάρ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; seldom in Attic dialect Prose, except in special phrases, see infr. VI, VII): A.I) joined with a substantive, to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with appellative, Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.—thataged man, [Refs]; αἰετοῦ. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, [Refs]; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, [Refs]; οἴχετ᾽ ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, [Refs]:—different from this are cases [Refs 8th c.BC+] if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships—I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, compare [Refs] A.II) frequently without a substantive, he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.III) placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons, ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷ᾽ οὔ πώ τιν᾽ ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —for the _Attic dialect_ usage see below A.IV) before a Possessive pronoun its demonstrative force is sometimes very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.V) for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ. without a substantive, in all cases, genders, and numbers, [Refs 8th c.BC+] properly refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter, ὁ δέ the former, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes in Partition, the one, the other, etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in genitive plural, being divided by the ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ, into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι, τῶν δ᾽ αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but frequently the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: so in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; if the Noun be collective, it is in the genitive singular, ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.2) when a negative accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.3) ὁ μέν τις, ὁ δέ τις. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν, ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.4) on τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, or τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs] A.VI.5) ὁ μέν is frequently used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ᾽ ἐσκίδναντο, Μυρμιδόνας δ᾽ οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; by ἄλλος δέ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.6) ὁ δέ following μέν sometimes refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ᾽, ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον. βεβλήκει [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rare in Attic dialect Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.7) ὁ δέ is frequently used simply in continuing a narrative, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.8) the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ᾽ ὁ. οὔθ᾽ ὁ [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VII) the following usages prevailed in Attic dialect Prose, A.VII.1) in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nominative singular masculine καὶ ὅ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Article were used (see. ὅς [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.I and cf. Sanskrit sas, alternatative form of sa); so, in accusative, καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VII.2) ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but mostly in accusative, καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ᾽ ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII) absolutely usages of single cases, A.VIII.1) feminine dative τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.b) with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —only poetry A.VIII.1.c) of Manner, τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν in this way, thus, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.d) repeated, τῇ μέν, τῇ δέ, in one way, in another, or partly, partly, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.e) relative, where, by which way, only Epic dialect, as [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2) neuter dative τῷ, therefore, on this account, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2.b) thus, so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.3) neuter accusative τό, wherefore, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also τὸ δέ absolutely, but the fact is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (compare above[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, [Refs 1st c.BC+] A.VIII.4) τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, partly, partly, or on the one hand, on the other, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι [Refs] several times. and finally, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5) of Time, sometimes that time, sometimes this (present) time, συνμαχία κ᾽ ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) [Refs 6th c.BC+] from that time, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.b) πρὸ τοῦ, sometimes written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.c) in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (literal before this [day]), and to-day's, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.VIII.6) ἐν τοῖς is frequently used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος (πρώτοις codices) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] the greatest number of ships, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with adverbs, ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον [Refs 1st c.BC+] B) ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signification in the earliest Gr, becoming commoner later. In [Refs 8th c.BC+] the demonstrative force can generally be traced, [Refs 4th c.BC+] I, but the definite Article must be recognized in places [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also when joined to an adjective to make it a substantive, αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον the hindmost man, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in τῶν ἄλλων [Refs]; also τὸ τρίτον[Refs]; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest,[Refs]—The true Article, however, is first fully established in 5th C Attic dialect, whilst the demonstrative usage disappears, except in a few cases, V. [Refs 4th c.BC+] —Chief usages, especially in _Attic dialect_ B.I) not only with common Appellats, adjectives, and Parts, to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also frequently where we use the Possessive pronoun, τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.b) omitted with proper nounsand frequently with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, see at {θεός} [Refs] III; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare Θράσυλος in [Refs]; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with proper nouns, save to give peculiar emphasis, like Latin ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.c) Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in [Refs] when he means the Platonic Socrates, as [Refs] B.I.d) for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc, see at {καί} [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.2) in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν. λεύσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.I.2.b) frequently with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.3) of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, see at {γεωγράφος}, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός. B.I.4) with infinitives, which thereby become Substantives, τὸ εἴργειν prevention, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.5) in neuter before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man; τὸ λέγω the word λέγ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', [Refs]; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ᾽ ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if. ', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.6) before relative clauses, when the Article serves to combine the whole relative clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν, καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.7) before Prons, B.I.7.a) before the person Prons, giving them greater emphasis, but only in accusative, τὸν ἐμέ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ[Refs] B.I.7.b) before the interrogative pronoun (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ποίας μερίδο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοῖς ποίοις; [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.7.c) with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc, the Article either makes the pronoun into a substantive, ὁ τοιοῦτος that sort of person, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or subjoins it to a substantive which already has an Article, τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.8) before ἅπας, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, [Refs 4th c.BC+] see entry; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs] B.I.9) the Article with the comparative is rare, if ἤ follows, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) elliptic expressions: B.II.1) before the genitive of a proper name, to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (i.e. υἱός) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (i.e. θυγάτηρ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M.the wife of [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.2) generally, before a genitive it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, [Refs]; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, [Refs]; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, [Refs]; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+] what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: and with genitive of [Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, [NT+5th c.BC+] B.II.3) very frequently with cases governed by Preps. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπ᾽ Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, [Refs] B.II.4) on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc, see at {μά} IV. B.II.5) in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (i.e. ὁδόν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ αὔριον (i.e. ἡμέρα), see at {αὔριον}; ἡ Λυδιστί (i.e. ἁρμονία) [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; but τό stands absolutely with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a substantive, as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects; both in nominative singular masculine ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, [Refs]; and in the forms beginning with τ, especially in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also in Ionic dialect Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; τό [Refs]; τῶν[Refs]—Never in Comedy texts or Attic dialect Prose:—Epic dialect genitive singular τεῦ [Refs 8th c.BC+] D) CRASIS OF ARTICLE: D.a) Attic dialect ὁ, ἡ, τό, with ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιο; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθ; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντο; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([musical notation]), Ionic dialect οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (see. ἕτερος), Attic dialect feminine ἡτέρα, dative θητέρᾳ (see. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc, before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (frequently written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Papyrus); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί=αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ. D.b) other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g, Doric dialect ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς-[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή [Refs 1st c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Pronounciation:
to
Language:
Greek
Definition:
the (sometimes to be supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom); the, this, that, one, he, she, it, etc; the definite article
eyes
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ὀφθαλμός
Greek:
ὀφθαλμοῖς
Transliteration:
ophthalmois
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
eye
Morphhology:
Noun Dative Plural Masculine
Grammar:
male PEOPLE OR THINGS that something is done for‚ or in relation to
Source:
Identical in all sources
Additional:
eyes
Tyndale
Word:
ὀφθαλμός
Transliteration:
ophthalmos
Gloss:
eye
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Male
Definition:
ὀφθαλμός, -οῦ, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for עַיִן;] the eye (as in cl, chiefly pl.): Mat.5:38, Mrk.9:47, Luk.6:41, Jhn.9:6, al; τοὺς ὀ. ἐξορύθσσειν (figuratively), Gal.4:15; ἐπᾶραι, Luk.6:20, Jhn.6:5; ἀνοῖξα, Act.9:40; id, of restoring sight, Mat.20:33, Jhn.9:10, al; ἐν ῥιπῇ ὀφθαλμοῦ, 1Co.15:52; by anthropom, of God, Heb.4:13, 1Pe.3:12; pleonastically (cf. Thackeray, Gr., 42f.), εἶδον οἱ ὀ. μοθ, Luk.2:30 (similarly, ib. 4:20 10:23, Jhn.12:40, 1Co.2:9, 1Jn.1:1, Rev.1:7). Metaphorical (as otherwise in cl; see LS, see word); (a) of ethical qualities: ὀ. πονηρός (meton, for envy; cf. Heb. עַיִן רַע, Pro.28:22; cf. Sir.14:10 34:13), Mat.6:22, 23 Mrk.7:22, Luk.11:34; ἁπλοῦς, Mat.6:22, Luk.11:34; ἐπιθυμία (which see) ὀφθαλμῶν (cf. Ecc.4:8, Sir.14:9), 1Jn.2:16; ὀ. μεστοὶ μοιχαλἰδος, 2Pe.2:14; (b) of mental vision: Mat.13:15, Mrk.8:18, Luk.19:42, Jhn.12:40, Rom.11:8, Gal.3:1, Eph.1:18, al; ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς before genitive (on the absence of the art, seeBl, §46, 9.II; M, Pr., 81), Mat.21:42, Mrk.12:11. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ὀφθαλμός
Transliteration:
ophthalmos
Gloss:
eye
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Male
Definition:
ὀφθαλμός, ὁ, (ὄπωπ-α, ὀφ-θῆναι, see at {ὄψ} B) eye, used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] mostly in plural; ὀφθαλμοὶ δ᾽ ὡς εἰ κέρα ἕστασαν. ἀτρέμας ἐν βλεφάροισι [Refs 8th c.BC+]: the plural continued most common, but the dual also occurs, as in [Refs 5th c.BC+] before one's eyes, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὀφθαλμοῖσιν ἰδεῖν, ὁρᾶσθαι, etc,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; but ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖσιν ὁρᾶν, νοεῖν, to see before one's eyes,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔχειν ἐν ὀ. to have before one's eyes, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἐν ὀ. what is before one's eyes, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ἐν τοῖς ὀ. δὴ γελοῖον what was ridiculous to the eye, [Refs]; ἐπίπροσθε τῶν ὀ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; γενέσθαι τινὶ ἐξ ὀφθαλμῶν to get out of any one's sight, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατ᾽ ὀφθαλμοὺς λέγειν τινί to tell one to one's face, opposed to εἰς οὖς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τυράννου κατ᾽ ὀ. κατηγορεῖν to accuse him to his face, [Refs 5th c.BC+], by eye, [Refs]; eyes were painted on the bows of vessels, βλοσυροῖς κατὰ πρῷραν ὀφθαλμοῖς οἷον βλέπει [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; whence the joke in [Refs 5th c.BC+] 2) στέρησις ὀφθαλμῶν temporary loss of sight, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] II) in singular, the eye of a master or ruler, πάντα ἰδὼν Διὸς ὀ. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀκοίμητος ὀ, of God, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; so a king is called ὀ. οἴκων [Refs 4th c.BC+]; and in Persia ὀφθαλμὸς βασιλέως the king's eye was a confidential officer, through whom he beheld his kingdom and subjects, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare οὖς. III) the eye of heaven, ἑσπέρας ὀ, νυκτὸς ὀ, of the moon, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also οὐράνιος ὀ, of the sun, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] IV) the dearest, best, as the eye is the most precious part of the body, hence of men, ὀ. Σικελίας, στρατιᾶς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also, light, cheer, comfort, μέγας [γ᾽] ὀ. οἱ πατρὸς τάφοι [Refs 5th c.BC+] V) eye or bud of a plant or tree, [Refs 7th c.BC+] VI) a surgical bandage covering one or both eyes, [Refs 5th c.BC+] VII) Architecture texts, in dual, the disks forming the centres of the volutes of an Ionic capital, [Refs]
Strongs
Word:
ὀφθαλμός
Transliteration:
ophthalmós
Pronounciation:
of-thal-mos'
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Noun Masculine
Definition:
the eye (literally or figuratively); by implication, vision; figuratively, envy (from the jealous side-glance); eye, sight; from g3700 (ὀπτάνομαι)
and
Strongs:
Lexicon:
καί
Greek:
καὶ
Transliteration:
kai
Context:
Next word
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kai
Gloss:
and
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
καί, conj., and I. Copulative. 1) Connecting single words; (a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. (b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; (with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. 2) Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult; esp. (a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss, LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al; (b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; (with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al; (d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al; (e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. 3) Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. 4) In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). 5) καὶ. καί, both. and (for τε. καί, see: τε); (a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al; (b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult; esp. with pron, adv, etc, Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ, Act.11:17; καθὼς κ, Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ, Rom.6:11; διὸ κ, Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss, BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ. (Bl, §77, 7; Deiss, BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ, 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ, Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl, §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; 1) with subjc. (cl.); (a) pres: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al; { (b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al; = cl. εἰ, with opt, Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7 " (LXX). 2) C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss, BS, 201f, LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl, §65, 4); (a) fut: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; (b) pres: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). 3) With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl, §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl, l.with), with subjc. pres, Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor, Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft, Ellic, in ll.); ἐ. τε. ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם. אִם, Est.19:13, al,] Rom.14:8. 4) = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf, Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f; Bl, §26, 4; Mayser, 152f; Deiss, BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ, Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al; ὅπου ἐ, Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ, Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ, 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ, 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ, Gal.5:10. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kai
Gloss:
and
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
καί, conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences, A) and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and, A.I) joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.I.2) to addalimiting or defining expression, πρὸς μακρὸν ὄρος κ. Κύνθιον ὄχθον to the mountain and specially to, [Refs 5th c.BC+] (sometimes in reverse order, πρὸς δῶμα Διὸς κ. μακρὸν Ὄλυμπον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; to add by way of climax, θεῶν. κ. Ποσειδῶνος all the gods, and above all. , [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently ἄλλοι τε καί, ἄλλως τε καί, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs]; ὀλίγου τινὸς ἄξια κ. οὐδενός little or nothing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. ταῦτα and this too. , γελᾶν ἀναπείθειν, κ. ταῦθ᾽ οὕτω πολέμιον ὄντα τῷ γέλωτι [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II) at the beginning of a sentence, A.II.1) in appeals or requests, καί μοι δὸς τὴν Χεῖρα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; καί μοι λέγε, καί μοι ἀπόκριναι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently in Oratt, καί μοι λέγε. τὸ ψήφισμα, καί μοι ἀνάγνωθι, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.2) in questions, to introduce an objection or express surprise, κ. τίς τόδ᾽ ἐξίκοιτ᾽ ἂν ἀγγέλων τάχο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; κ. πῶς; pray how? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. δὴ τί; but then what? [Refs]; κ. ποῖον; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τίς εἶδε πώποτε βοῦς κριβανίτα; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κἄπειτ᾽ ἔκανε; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τίς πώποτε Χαριζόμενος ἑτέρῳ τοῦτο εἰργάσατ; [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.3) ={καίτοι}, and yet, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.4) at the beginning of a speech, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III) after words implying sameness or like ness, as, γνώμῃσι ἐχρέωντο ὁμοίῃσι κ. σύ they had the same opinion as you, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἴσον or ἴσα κ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν ἴσῳ (i.e. ἐστὶ) κ. εἰ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.2) after words implying comparison or opposition, αἱ δαπάναι οὐχ ὁμοίως κ. πρίν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.3) to express simultaneity, ἦν ἦμαρ δεύτερον, κἀγὼ κατηγόμην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; παρέρχονταί τε μέσαι νύκτες κ. ψύχεται [τὸ ὕδωρ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι] οὐκ ἔφθασαν τὴν ἀρχὴν κατασχόντες κ. Θηβαίοις εὐθὺς ἐπεβούλευσαν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.IV) joining an affirmative clause with a negative, ἀλλ᾽ ὥς τι δράσων εἷρπε κοὐ θανούμενος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.V) καί, καί. correlative, not only, but also. , κ. ἀεὶ κ. νῦν, κ. τότε κ. νῦν, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) by anacoluthon, ὣς φαμένη κ. κερδοσύνῃ ἡγήσατ᾽ Ἀθήνη, for ὣς ἔφη κ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔρχεται δὲ αὐτή τε. κ. τὸν υἱὸν ἔχουσα, for κ. ὁ υἱός, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B) even, also, just, B.1) τάχα κεν κ. ἀναίτιον αἰτιόῳτο even the innocent, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δόμεναι κ. μεῖζον ἄεθλον an even greater prize, [Refs]full five,[Refs 5th c.BC+] two or three, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2) also, κ. ἐγώ I also, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. αὐτοί they also, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἀγίας καὶ Σωκράτης κ. τούτω ἀπεθανέτην likewise died, [Refs]; in adding surnames, etc, Ὦχος ὁ κ. Δαρειαῖος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; nominative ὁ κ. first in [Refs 1st c.BC+], frequently later, [Refs 2nd c.AD+], etc; Ἰούδας ὁ κ. Μακκαβαῖος [NT+8th c.BC+]; εἴπερ τι κ. ἄλλο, ὥς τις κ. ἄλλος, [Refs 5th c.BC+], not only, but also. , see at {μόνος}; οὐδὲν μᾶλλον. ἢ οὐ καὶ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2.b) frequently used both in the antecedent and relative clause, where we put also in the antecedent only, εἰ μὲν κ. σὺ εἶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ὧνπερ κ. ἐγώ [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.3) frequently in apodosi, after temporal Conjs, ἀλλ᾽ ὅτε δή ῥα, κ. τότε δή. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also after εἰ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: as a Hebraism, κ. ἐγένετο. κ. [LXX+NT] B.4) with Advs, to give emphasis, κ. κάρτα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. λίην full surely, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. πάλαι, κ. πάνυ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. μάλα, κ. σφόδρα, in answers, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.5) with words expressing a minimum, even so much as, were it but, just, ἱέμενος κ. καπνὸν ἀποθρῴσκοντα νοῆσαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷς ἡδὺ κ. λέγειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τίς δὲ κ. προσβλέψετα; who will so much as look at you? [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.6) just, τοῦτ᾽ αὐτὸ κ. νοσοῦμεν 'tis just that that ails me, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: frequently with a relative, τὸ κ. κλαίουσα τέτηκα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; and how long ago was the city sacked? [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ποῦ καί σφε θάπτε; where is he burying her? [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.7) even, just, implying assent, ἔπειτά με κ. λίποι αἰών thereafter let life e'en leave me, [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.8) κ. εἰ even if, of a whole condition represented as an extreme case, opposed to εἰ κ. although, notwithstanding that, of a condition represented as immaterial even if fulfilled,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰ κ. ἠπιστάμην if I had been able, [Refs 5th c.BC+] each exert their force separtely, as εἴ περ ἀδειής τ᾽ ἐστί, καὶ εἰ. and if. [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.9) before a Participle, to represent either καὶ εἰ, or εἰ καί, although, albeit, Ἕκτορα κ. μεμαῶτα μάχης σχήσεσθαι ὀΐω, for ἢν κ. μεμάῃ, how much soever he rage, although he rage, [Refs 8th c.BC+] C) Position: καί and, is by Poets sometimes put after another word, ἔγνωκα, τοῖσδε κοὐδὲν ἀντειπεῖν ἔχω, for καὶ τοῖσδε οὐδέν [Refs 4th c.BC+] C.2) καί also, sometimes goes between a preposition and its case, ἐν κ. θαλάσσᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.3) very seldom at the end of a verse, [Refs 5th c.BC+] D) crasis: with ᾰ, as κἄν, κἀγαθοί, etc; with ε, as κἀγώ, κἄπειτα, etc, Doric dialect κἠγώ, κἤπειτα, etc; with η, as Χἠ, Χἠμέρη, Χἠμεῖς, etc; with ῐ in Χἰκετεύετε, Χἰλαρ; with ο, as Χὠ, Χὤστις, etc; with υ in Χὐμεῖς, Χὐποχείριον, etc; with ω in the pronoun ᾧ, Χ; with αι, as κᾀσχρῶ; with αυ, as καὐτό; with ει, as κεἰ, κεἰς (but also κἀς), κᾆτ; with εὐ, as κεὐγένεια, κεὐσταλή; with οι in Χοἰ (Χᾠ [Refs]; with ου in Χοὖτος, κοὐ, κοὐδέ, and the like.
Strongs
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kaí
Pronounciation:
kahee
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Definition:
and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in connection (or composition) with other particles or small words; and, also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when, yet; apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also a cumulative force
with the
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ὁ
Greek:
τοῖς
Transliteration:
tois
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Definite article Dative Plural Neuter
Grammar:
specific neuter people or things that something is done for‚ or in relation to
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. I. As demonstr. pron. 1) As frequently in Hom, absol, he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). 2) Distributive, ὁ μὲν. ὁ δέ, the one. the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl, Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al; οἱ μὲν. ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀. ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. 3) In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, 1) to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc, to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. 2) To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc; with poss. pron, ἐμός, σός, etc; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj, both with art, ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. 3) To Other parts of speech used as substantives; (a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc; (b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc; (with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp, every one who, etc; (d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; (e) infinitives: nom, τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf, see Bl, §71). 4) In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. 5) To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol, in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. 6) To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is, when thus written, A) demonstrative Pronoun. B ) in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article. C ) in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive singular is in many places τῶ, accusative plural τώς, but Cretan dialect, etc, τόνς [Refs]; in Lesbian Aeolic dialect the accusative plural forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, [Refs]; dative plural τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, see above), [Refs]; ταῖσι as demonstrative, [Refs 7th c.BC+] Poets also used the Ionic dialect and _Epic dialect_ forms τοῖσι, ταῖσ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν, τοὶ δέ, for οἱ μέν, οἱ δέ, not only in Lyric poetry, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but even in a trimeter, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {ὅ}; τὼ πόλεε Foed. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in [Refs 4th c.AD+] functions as genitive dual feminine, μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν [Refs 4th c.BC+] —in Elean and _Boeotian dialect_ ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, ={ὅδε}, ἥδε, τόδε, _nominative_ _plural_ _masculine_ τυΐ the following men, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] cf. Sanskrit demonstrative pronoun sa, sā, Gothic sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Latin accusative sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from *τόδ] cf. Sanskrit tat (tad), Latin is-tud, Gothic pata: —with τοί cf. Sanskrit te, Lithuanian tĩe, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] pá, etc:—with τάων cf. Sanskrit tāsām, Latin is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (which see) is different.) A) ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in [Refs 8th c.BC+] the commonest sense: frequently also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in Trag. (mostly in Lyric poetry, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τῶν γάρ, τῆς γάρ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; seldom in Attic dialect Prose, except in special phrases, see infr. VI, VII): A.I) joined with a substantive, to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with appellative, Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.—thataged man, [Refs]; αἰετοῦ. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, [Refs]; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, [Refs]; οἴχετ᾽ ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, [Refs]:—different from this are cases [Refs 8th c.BC+] if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships—I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, compare [Refs] A.II) frequently without a substantive, he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.III) placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons, ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷ᾽ οὔ πώ τιν᾽ ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —for the _Attic dialect_ usage see below A.IV) before a Possessive pronoun its demonstrative force is sometimes very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.V) for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ. without a substantive, in all cases, genders, and numbers, [Refs 8th c.BC+] properly refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter, ὁ δέ the former, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes in Partition, the one, the other, etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in genitive plural, being divided by the ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ, into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι, τῶν δ᾽ αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but frequently the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: so in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; if the Noun be collective, it is in the genitive singular, ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.2) when a negative accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.3) ὁ μέν τις, ὁ δέ τις. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν, ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.4) on τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, or τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs] A.VI.5) ὁ μέν is frequently used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ᾽ ἐσκίδναντο, Μυρμιδόνας δ᾽ οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; by ἄλλος δέ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.6) ὁ δέ following μέν sometimes refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ᾽, ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον. βεβλήκει [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rare in Attic dialect Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.7) ὁ δέ is frequently used simply in continuing a narrative, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.8) the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ᾽ ὁ. οὔθ᾽ ὁ [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VII) the following usages prevailed in Attic dialect Prose, A.VII.1) in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nominative singular masculine καὶ ὅ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Article were used (see. ὅς [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.I and cf. Sanskrit sas, alternatative form of sa); so, in accusative, καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VII.2) ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but mostly in accusative, καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ᾽ ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII) absolutely usages of single cases, A.VIII.1) feminine dative τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.b) with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —only poetry A.VIII.1.c) of Manner, τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν in this way, thus, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.d) repeated, τῇ μέν, τῇ δέ, in one way, in another, or partly, partly, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.e) relative, where, by which way, only Epic dialect, as [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2) neuter dative τῷ, therefore, on this account, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2.b) thus, so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.3) neuter accusative τό, wherefore, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also τὸ δέ absolutely, but the fact is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (compare above[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, [Refs 1st c.BC+] A.VIII.4) τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, partly, partly, or on the one hand, on the other, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι [Refs] several times. and finally, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5) of Time, sometimes that time, sometimes this (present) time, συνμαχία κ᾽ ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) [Refs 6th c.BC+] from that time, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.b) πρὸ τοῦ, sometimes written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.c) in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (literal before this [day]), and to-day's, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.VIII.6) ἐν τοῖς is frequently used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος (πρώτοις codices) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] the greatest number of ships, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with adverbs, ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον [Refs 1st c.BC+] B) ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signification in the earliest Gr, becoming commoner later. In [Refs 8th c.BC+] the demonstrative force can generally be traced, [Refs 4th c.BC+] I, but the definite Article must be recognized in places [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also when joined to an adjective to make it a substantive, αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον the hindmost man, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in τῶν ἄλλων [Refs]; also τὸ τρίτον[Refs]; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest,[Refs]—The true Article, however, is first fully established in 5th C Attic dialect, whilst the demonstrative usage disappears, except in a few cases, V. [Refs 4th c.BC+] —Chief usages, especially in _Attic dialect_ B.I) not only with common Appellats, adjectives, and Parts, to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also frequently where we use the Possessive pronoun, τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.b) omitted with proper nounsand frequently with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, see at {θεός} [Refs] III; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare Θράσυλος in [Refs]; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with proper nouns, save to give peculiar emphasis, like Latin ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.c) Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in [Refs] when he means the Platonic Socrates, as [Refs] B.I.d) for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc, see at {καί} [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.2) in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν. λεύσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.I.2.b) frequently with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.3) of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, see at {γεωγράφος}, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός. B.I.4) with infinitives, which thereby become Substantives, τὸ εἴργειν prevention, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.5) in neuter before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man; τὸ λέγω the word λέγ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', [Refs]; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ᾽ ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if. ', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.6) before relative clauses, when the Article serves to combine the whole relative clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν, καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.7) before Prons, B.I.7.a) before the person Prons, giving them greater emphasis, but only in accusative, τὸν ἐμέ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ[Refs] B.I.7.b) before the interrogative pronoun (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ποίας μερίδο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοῖς ποίοις; [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.7.c) with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc, the Article either makes the pronoun into a substantive, ὁ τοιοῦτος that sort of person, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or subjoins it to a substantive which already has an Article, τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.8) before ἅπας, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, [Refs 4th c.BC+] see entry; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs] B.I.9) the Article with the comparative is rare, if ἤ follows, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) elliptic expressions: B.II.1) before the genitive of a proper name, to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (i.e. υἱός) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (i.e. θυγάτηρ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M.the wife of [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.2) generally, before a genitive it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, [Refs]; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, [Refs]; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, [Refs]; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+] what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: and with genitive of [Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, [NT+5th c.BC+] B.II.3) very frequently with cases governed by Preps. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπ᾽ Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, [Refs] B.II.4) on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc, see at {μά} IV. B.II.5) in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (i.e. ὁδόν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ αὔριον (i.e. ἡμέρα), see at {αὔριον}; ἡ Λυδιστί (i.e. ἁρμονία) [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; but τό stands absolutely with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a substantive, as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects; both in nominative singular masculine ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, [Refs]; and in the forms beginning with τ, especially in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also in Ionic dialect Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; τό [Refs]; τῶν[Refs]—Never in Comedy texts or Attic dialect Prose:—Epic dialect genitive singular τεῦ [Refs 8th c.BC+] D) CRASIS OF ARTICLE: D.a) Attic dialect ὁ, ἡ, τό, with ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιο; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθ; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντο; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([musical notation]), Ionic dialect οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (see. ἕτερος), Attic dialect feminine ἡτέρα, dative θητέρᾳ (see. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc, before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (frequently written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Papyrus); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί=αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ. D.b) other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g, Doric dialect ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς-[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή [Refs 1st c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Pronounciation:
to
Language:
Greek
Definition:
the (sometimes to be supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom); the, this, that, one, he, she, it, etc; the definite article
ears
Strongs:
Lexicon:
οὖς
Greek:
ὠσὶν
Transliteration:
ōsin
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
ear
Morphhology:
Noun Dative Plural Neuter
Grammar:
neuter PEOPLE OR THINGS that something is done for‚ or in relation to
Source:
Identical in all sources
Additional:
ears
Tyndale
Word:
οὖς
Transliteration:
ous
Gloss:
ear
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Neuter
Definition:
οὖς genitive, ὠτός, τό, [in LXX chiefly for אֹזֶן;] the ear: Mat.13:16, Mrk.7:33, Luk.22:50, 1Co.2:9 12:16, 1Pe.3:12; ἐν τ. ὠσί, Luk.4:21; εἰς τ. ὦτα ἀκούεσθαι, Act.7:57; γίνεσθαι, Luk.1:44; εἰσέρχεσθαι, Jas.5:4; εἰς τ. οὖς ἀκούειν, Mat.10:27; πρὸς τ. οὖς λαλεῖν, Luk.12:3; τὰ ὦ. συνέχειν (MM, xviii), Act.7:57. Metaphorical, of understanding, perceiving, knowing: Mat.13:16; ὁ ἔχων (εἴ τις ἔχει) οὖς ἀκουσάτω, Rev.2:7, 11 2:17, 29 3:6, 13 13:9; ὁ ἔχων (ὃς ἔχει, εἴ τις ἔχει) ὦτα (ἀκούειν) ἀκουέτω, Mat.11:15 13:9, 43, Mrk.4:9, 23 7:16 (R, mg.), Luk.8:8 14:35; τοῖς ὠ. βαρέως ἀκούειν, Mat.13:15 Act.28:27 " (LXX); ὦ. ἔχοντες οὐκ ἀκούειν, Mrk.8:18; ὦ. τοῦ μὴ ἀκούειν, Rom.11:8; θέσθε εἰς τὰ ὦ, Luk.9:44; ἀπερίτμητος τοῖς ὠ, Act.7:51. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
οὖς
Transliteration:
ous
Gloss:
ear
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Neuter
Definition:
οὖς (nominative singular frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; the other cases he forms as if from οὖας (which is found in [Refs 5th c.BC+], dative οὔασι [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Hellenistic nominative singular ὦς [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: also Doric dialect ὦς [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; plural ὤϝαθ᾽ conjecture for ὦτά θ᾽ in [Refs 7th c.BC+]:—ear, Ἄντιφον αὖ παρὰ οὖς ἔλασε ξίφει [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αἲ γὰρ δή μοι ἀπ᾽ οὔατος ὧδε γένοιτο oh may I never hear of such a thing! [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὀρθὰ ἱστάναι τὰ ὦτα, of horses, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; βοᾷ ἐν ὠσὶ κέλαδος rings in the ear, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὀξὺν δι᾽ ὤτων κέλαδον ἐνσείσας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ (ἐς conjecture Dawes) οὔατα λάθριος εἶπεν [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; reversely, παρέχειν τὰ ὦτα to lend the ears, i. e. to attend, [Refs 5th c.BC+] those who have ears to hear, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ὦτα ἐπὶ τῶν ὤμων ἔχοντες, of persons who slink away ashamed (hanging their ears like dogs), [Refs 5th c.BC+]: proverbial, see at {λύκο; τεθλασμένος οὔατα πυγμαῖς}, of a boxer, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ ἀμφότερα τὰ ὦτα καθεύδειν sleep soundly, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II) from resemblance to an ear, II.1) handle, especially of pitchers, cups, etc, οὔατα δ᾽ αὐτοῦ τέσσαρ᾽ ἔσαν [Refs 8th c.BC+] II.2) in Architecture texts, ={παρωτίς}[Refs] II.3) οὖς Ἀφροδίτης, a kind of shell-fish, Antig.Car. cited in [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; οὖς θαλάττιον, ={ἀγρία λεπάς}, [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.4) τὰ ὦτα (οὔατα [Refs 5th c.BC+] the auricles of the heart, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.5) name of part of a bandage, Heraclas cited in [Refs 4th c.AD+]. [prev. cited]] (Cogn. with Latin auris, Lithuanian ausìs, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] éar, etc; details obscure; nominative singular οὖς perhaps from *ο(ϝ)ος (contained in ἀμφώης).)
Strongs
Word:
οὖς
Transliteration:
oûs
Pronounciation:
ooce
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Noun Neuter
Definition:
the ear (physically or mentally); ear; apparently a primary word
they may hear
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ἀκούω
Greek:
ἀκούσωσιν
Transliteration:
akousōsin
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
to hear
Morphhology:
Verb Aorist Active Subjunctive 3rd Plural
Grammar:
an ACTION that maybe happened - by people or things being discussed
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
ἀκούω
Transliteration:
akouō
Gloss:
to hear
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
ἀκούω, [in LXX chiefly for שׁמע] to hear, listen, attend, perceive by hearing, comprehend by hearing. 1) Intrans: Mrk.4:3 7:37, Jas.2:5, Rev.2:7, al; τ. ὠσίν, Mat.13:15 (LXX); with cogn. dative, ακοῇ ἀ. (see: ἀκοή), Mat.13:14, Act.28:26 " (LXX); ὁ ἔχων ὦτα (οὖς) ἀκούειν, ἀκουσάτω, Mat.11:15, Mrk.4:23, Rev.2:7, al. 2) Trans, prop. with accusative of thing(s), of thing heard, genitive of person(s), from whom heard (LS, see word): Act.1:4; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.12:19, Jhn.3:8 (Abbott, JG, 76), Act.22:9, al; with dupl. accusative, Jhn.12:18, 1Co.11:18; with genitive of thing(s), Jhn.7:40 (Abbott, JV, 116); τ. φωνῆς (cf. Heb. שָׁמַע בְּקוֹל, Exo.18:19), Jhn.5:25, 28 Act.9:7 (on the distinction bet. this and ἀ. φωνήν, ib. 4, see M, Pr., 66; Field, Notes, 117; Abbott, Essays, 93f.); of God answering prayer, Jhn.9:31, 1Jn.5:14, 15; with accusative of thing(s), before παρά, Jhn.8:26, 40 Act.10:22, 2Ti.2:2; id. before ἀπό, 1Jn.1:5; with genitive pars. before ptcp, Mrk.14:58, Luk.18:36, al. (On NT usage generally, see Bl, §36, 5; Cremer, 82.) (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ἀκούω
Transliteration:
akouō
Gloss:
to hear
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
ἀκούω: Epic dialect imperfect ᾰκουον[Refs 8th c.BC+]future ἀκούσομαι (active ἀκούσω first in [NT+4th c.BC+]aorist ἤκουσα, Epic dialect ᾰκουσα[Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect ἀκήκοα, Laconian dialect ἄκουκα[Refs 1st c.AD+]; ἤκουκα is a late form, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; later Ionic dialect ἀκήκουκα[Refs 3rd c.BC+]: pluperfect ἀκηκόειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; old Attic dialect ἠκηκόη[Refs 5th c.BC+] —rare in middle, present (see. below [Refs]: Epic dialect imperfect ἀκούετο[Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist ἠκουσάμην[Refs 2nd c.BC+]:—passive, future ἀκουσθήσομαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἠκούσθην[Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect ἤκουσμαι[Refs 1st c.BC+]; ἀκήκουσμαι is uncertain in [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: pluperfect ἤκουστο[Refs 4th c.BC+], (παρ-) [Refs 1st c.AD+]:—hear, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: properly with accusative of thing heard, genitive of person from whom it is heard, ταῦτα Καλυψοῦς ἤκουσα[Refs 8th c.BC+]; or the accusative of things, ἄκουε τοῦ θανόντος[Refs]:—also with genitive _of things_, φθογγῆς, κτύπου, hear it, [Refs 8th c.BC+] in middle, ἀκούετο λαὸς ἀϋτῆς[Refs 8th c.BC+] b) with genitive objecti, hear of, hear tell of, ἀ. πατρός[Refs 8th c.BC+]participle, τεθνηῶτος (i.e. πατρός) ἀκούσῃς[Refs]; but εἰ. πατρὸς νόστον ἀ.[Refs 8th c.BC+] c) in Prose the person from whom thing is heard frequently takes preposition, ἀ. τι ἀπό, ἐκ, παρά, πρός τινος, first in [Refs 8th c.BC+] d) less frequently with double genitive person et of things, hear of a thing from a person, as [Refs 8th c.BC+] e) with participle or infinitive added, as εἰ πτώσσοντας ὑφ᾽ Ἕκτορι πάντας ἀκούσαι should he hear that all are now crouching under Hector, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀ. αὐτὸν ὄλβιον εἶναι to hear [generally] that he is happy, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν Δαίδαλον οὐκ ἀκήκοας, ὁτι; [Refs 5th c.BC+] f) with genitive et participle, to express what one actually hears from a person, ταῦτ᾽. ἤκουον σαφῶς Ὀδυσσέως λέγοντος[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. τινὸς λέγοντος, διαλεγομένου, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: rarely with accusative et participle, [Refs 5th c.BC+] 2) know by hearsay, ἔξοιδ᾽ ἀκούων[Refs 5th c.BC+]: present is used like a perfect, νῆσός τις Συρίη κικλήσκεται, εἴ που ἀκούεις[Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Prose, [Refs 5th c.BC+] 3) absolutely, hearken, give ear, especially in proclamations, ἀκούετε λεῴ oyez! oyez! Susar.[Refs 5th c.BC+] 4) οἱ ἀκούοντες readers of a book, [Refs 2nd c.BC+] II) listen to, give ear to, with genitive, [Refs 8th c.BC+]participle after dative, ὅττι οἱ ὦκ᾽ ἤκουσε. θεὸς εὐξαμένοιο[Refs] II.2) obey, βασιλῆος, θεοῦ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —middle, Λεωφίλου δ᾽ ἀκούεται [πάντα] [Refs 7th c.BC+] II.3) hear and understand, κλύοντες οὐκ ἤκουον[Refs 5th c.BC+] II.4) to be a pupil of, with genitive, [Refs 3rd c.AD+] III) after [Refs 8th c.BC+]passive to λέγειν, hear oneself called, be called, like Latin audire, εἴπερ ὄρθ᾽ ἀκούεις, Ζεῦ[Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently with εὖ and κακῶς, κακῶς ἀ. ὑπό τινος to be ill spoken of by one; πρός τινος[Refs 5th c.BC+].; περί τινος for a thing, [Refs].; ἄμεινον, ἄριστα ἀ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] III.2) with nominative of subject, ἀκούειν κακός, καλός, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; later in passive in this sense, [Refs 4th c.AD+] III.3) with infinitive, ἤκουον εἶναι πρῶτοι were said to be first, [Refs 5th c.BC+] III.4) with accusative of things, ἀ. κακά have evil spoken of one, [Refs 5th c.BC+] III.5) οὕτως ἀ. hear it so said, i. e. at first hearing, ὡς οὕτω γ᾽ ἀκοῦσαι[Refs 5th c.BC+] IV) understand, take in a certain sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τι ἐπί τινος [Refs 5th c.BC+] V) Astrology texts, aspect mutually, of signs equidistant from an equinoctial sign, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; also, ={ὑπακούειν} (which see), [Refs]
Strongs
Word:
ἀκούω
Transliteration:
akoúō
Pronounciation:
ak-oo'-o
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Verb
Definition:
to hear (in various senses); give (in the) audience (of), come (to the ears), (shall) hear(-er, -ken), be noised, be reported, understand; a primary verb
and
Strongs:
Lexicon:
καί
Greek:
καὶ
Transliteration:
kai
Context:
Next word
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kai
Gloss:
and
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
καί, conj., and I. Copulative. 1) Connecting single words; (a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. (b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; (with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. 2) Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult; esp. (a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss, LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al; (b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; (with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al; (d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al; (e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. 3) Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. 4) In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). 5) καὶ. καί, both. and (for τε. καί, see: τε); (a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al; (b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult; esp. with pron, adv, etc, Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ, Act.11:17; καθὼς κ, Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ, Rom.6:11; διὸ κ, Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss, BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ. (Bl, §77, 7; Deiss, BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ, 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ, Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl, §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; 1) with subjc. (cl.); (a) pres: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al; { (b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al; = cl. εἰ, with opt, Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7 " (LXX). 2) C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss, BS, 201f, LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl, §65, 4); (a) fut: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; (b) pres: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). 3) With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl, §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl, l.with), with subjc. pres, Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor, Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft, Ellic, in ll.); ἐ. τε. ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם. אִם, Est.19:13, al,] Rom.14:8. 4) = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf, Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f; Bl, §26, 4; Mayser, 152f; Deiss, BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ, Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al; ὅπου ἐ, Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ, Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ, 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ, 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ, Gal.5:10. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kai
Gloss:
and
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
καί, conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences, A) and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and, A.I) joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.I.2) to addalimiting or defining expression, πρὸς μακρὸν ὄρος κ. Κύνθιον ὄχθον to the mountain and specially to, [Refs 5th c.BC+] (sometimes in reverse order, πρὸς δῶμα Διὸς κ. μακρὸν Ὄλυμπον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; to add by way of climax, θεῶν. κ. Ποσειδῶνος all the gods, and above all. , [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently ἄλλοι τε καί, ἄλλως τε καί, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs]; ὀλίγου τινὸς ἄξια κ. οὐδενός little or nothing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. ταῦτα and this too. , γελᾶν ἀναπείθειν, κ. ταῦθ᾽ οὕτω πολέμιον ὄντα τῷ γέλωτι [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II) at the beginning of a sentence, A.II.1) in appeals or requests, καί μοι δὸς τὴν Χεῖρα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; καί μοι λέγε, καί μοι ἀπόκριναι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently in Oratt, καί μοι λέγε. τὸ ψήφισμα, καί μοι ἀνάγνωθι, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.2) in questions, to introduce an objection or express surprise, κ. τίς τόδ᾽ ἐξίκοιτ᾽ ἂν ἀγγέλων τάχο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; κ. πῶς; pray how? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. δὴ τί; but then what? [Refs]; κ. ποῖον; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τίς εἶδε πώποτε βοῦς κριβανίτα; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κἄπειτ᾽ ἔκανε; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τίς πώποτε Χαριζόμενος ἑτέρῳ τοῦτο εἰργάσατ; [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.3) ={καίτοι}, and yet, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.4) at the beginning of a speech, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III) after words implying sameness or like ness, as, γνώμῃσι ἐχρέωντο ὁμοίῃσι κ. σύ they had the same opinion as you, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἴσον or ἴσα κ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν ἴσῳ (i.e. ἐστὶ) κ. εἰ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.2) after words implying comparison or opposition, αἱ δαπάναι οὐχ ὁμοίως κ. πρίν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.3) to express simultaneity, ἦν ἦμαρ δεύτερον, κἀγὼ κατηγόμην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; παρέρχονταί τε μέσαι νύκτες κ. ψύχεται [τὸ ὕδωρ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι] οὐκ ἔφθασαν τὴν ἀρχὴν κατασχόντες κ. Θηβαίοις εὐθὺς ἐπεβούλευσαν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.IV) joining an affirmative clause with a negative, ἀλλ᾽ ὥς τι δράσων εἷρπε κοὐ θανούμενος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.V) καί, καί. correlative, not only, but also. , κ. ἀεὶ κ. νῦν, κ. τότε κ. νῦν, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) by anacoluthon, ὣς φαμένη κ. κερδοσύνῃ ἡγήσατ᾽ Ἀθήνη, for ὣς ἔφη κ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔρχεται δὲ αὐτή τε. κ. τὸν υἱὸν ἔχουσα, for κ. ὁ υἱός, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B) even, also, just, B.1) τάχα κεν κ. ἀναίτιον αἰτιόῳτο even the innocent, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δόμεναι κ. μεῖζον ἄεθλον an even greater prize, [Refs]full five,[Refs 5th c.BC+] two or three, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2) also, κ. ἐγώ I also, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. αὐτοί they also, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἀγίας καὶ Σωκράτης κ. τούτω ἀπεθανέτην likewise died, [Refs]; in adding surnames, etc, Ὦχος ὁ κ. Δαρειαῖος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; nominative ὁ κ. first in [Refs 1st c.BC+], frequently later, [Refs 2nd c.AD+], etc; Ἰούδας ὁ κ. Μακκαβαῖος [NT+8th c.BC+]; εἴπερ τι κ. ἄλλο, ὥς τις κ. ἄλλος, [Refs 5th c.BC+], not only, but also. , see at {μόνος}; οὐδὲν μᾶλλον. ἢ οὐ καὶ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2.b) frequently used both in the antecedent and relative clause, where we put also in the antecedent only, εἰ μὲν κ. σὺ εἶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ὧνπερ κ. ἐγώ [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.3) frequently in apodosi, after temporal Conjs, ἀλλ᾽ ὅτε δή ῥα, κ. τότε δή. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also after εἰ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: as a Hebraism, κ. ἐγένετο. κ. [LXX+NT] B.4) with Advs, to give emphasis, κ. κάρτα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. λίην full surely, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. πάλαι, κ. πάνυ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. μάλα, κ. σφόδρα, in answers, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.5) with words expressing a minimum, even so much as, were it but, just, ἱέμενος κ. καπνὸν ἀποθρῴσκοντα νοῆσαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷς ἡδὺ κ. λέγειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τίς δὲ κ. προσβλέψετα; who will so much as look at you? [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.6) just, τοῦτ᾽ αὐτὸ κ. νοσοῦμεν 'tis just that that ails me, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: frequently with a relative, τὸ κ. κλαίουσα τέτηκα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; and how long ago was the city sacked? [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ποῦ καί σφε θάπτε; where is he burying her? [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.7) even, just, implying assent, ἔπειτά με κ. λίποι αἰών thereafter let life e'en leave me, [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.8) κ. εἰ even if, of a whole condition represented as an extreme case, opposed to εἰ κ. although, notwithstanding that, of a condition represented as immaterial even if fulfilled,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰ κ. ἠπιστάμην if I had been able, [Refs 5th c.BC+] each exert their force separtely, as εἴ περ ἀδειής τ᾽ ἐστί, καὶ εἰ. and if. [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.9) before a Participle, to represent either καὶ εἰ, or εἰ καί, although, albeit, Ἕκτορα κ. μεμαῶτα μάχης σχήσεσθαι ὀΐω, for ἢν κ. μεμάῃ, how much soever he rage, although he rage, [Refs 8th c.BC+] C) Position: καί and, is by Poets sometimes put after another word, ἔγνωκα, τοῖσδε κοὐδὲν ἀντειπεῖν ἔχω, for καὶ τοῖσδε οὐδέν [Refs 4th c.BC+] C.2) καί also, sometimes goes between a preposition and its case, ἐν κ. θαλάσσᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.3) very seldom at the end of a verse, [Refs 5th c.BC+] D) crasis: with ᾰ, as κἄν, κἀγαθοί, etc; with ε, as κἀγώ, κἄπειτα, etc, Doric dialect κἠγώ, κἤπειτα, etc; with η, as Χἠ, Χἠμέρη, Χἠμεῖς, etc; with ῐ in Χἰκετεύετε, Χἰλαρ; with ο, as Χὠ, Χὤστις, etc; with υ in Χὐμεῖς, Χὐποχείριον, etc; with ω in the pronoun ᾧ, Χ; with αι, as κᾀσχρῶ; with αυ, as καὐτό; with ει, as κεἰ, κεἰς (but also κἀς), κᾆτ; with εὐ, as κεὐγένεια, κεὐσταλή; with οι in Χοἰ (Χᾠ [Refs]; with ου in Χοὖτος, κοὐ, κοὐδέ, and the like.
Strongs
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kaí
Pronounciation:
kahee
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Definition:
and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in connection (or composition) with other particles or small words; and, also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when, yet; apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also a cumulative force
with the
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ὁ
Greek:
τῇ
Transliteration:
tēa
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Definite article Dative Singular Feminine
Grammar:
a specific female person or thing that something is done for‚ or in relation to
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. I. As demonstr. pron. 1) As frequently in Hom, absol, he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). 2) Distributive, ὁ μὲν. ὁ δέ, the one. the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl, Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al; οἱ μὲν. ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀. ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. 3) In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, 1) to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc, to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. 2) To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc; with poss. pron, ἐμός, σός, etc; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj, both with art, ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. 3) To Other parts of speech used as substantives; (a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc; (b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc; (with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp, every one who, etc; (d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; (e) infinitives: nom, τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf, see Bl, §71). 4) In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. 5) To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol, in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. 6) To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is, when thus written, A) demonstrative Pronoun. B ) in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article. C ) in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive singular is in many places τῶ, accusative plural τώς, but Cretan dialect, etc, τόνς [Refs]; in Lesbian Aeolic dialect the accusative plural forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, [Refs]; dative plural τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, see above), [Refs]; ταῖσι as demonstrative, [Refs 7th c.BC+] Poets also used the Ionic dialect and _Epic dialect_ forms τοῖσι, ταῖσ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν, τοὶ δέ, for οἱ μέν, οἱ δέ, not only in Lyric poetry, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but even in a trimeter, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {ὅ}; τὼ πόλεε Foed. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in [Refs 4th c.AD+] functions as genitive dual feminine, μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν [Refs 4th c.BC+] —in Elean and _Boeotian dialect_ ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, ={ὅδε}, ἥδε, τόδε, _nominative_ _plural_ _masculine_ τυΐ the following men, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] cf. Sanskrit demonstrative pronoun sa, sā, Gothic sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Latin accusative sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from *τόδ] cf. Sanskrit tat (tad), Latin is-tud, Gothic pata: —with τοί cf. Sanskrit te, Lithuanian tĩe, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] pá, etc:—with τάων cf. Sanskrit tāsām, Latin is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (which see) is different.) A) ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in [Refs 8th c.BC+] the commonest sense: frequently also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in Trag. (mostly in Lyric poetry, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τῶν γάρ, τῆς γάρ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; seldom in Attic dialect Prose, except in special phrases, see infr. VI, VII): A.I) joined with a substantive, to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with appellative, Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.—thataged man, [Refs]; αἰετοῦ. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, [Refs]; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, [Refs]; οἴχετ᾽ ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, [Refs]:—different from this are cases [Refs 8th c.BC+] if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships—I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, compare [Refs] A.II) frequently without a substantive, he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.III) placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons, ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷ᾽ οὔ πώ τιν᾽ ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —for the _Attic dialect_ usage see below A.IV) before a Possessive pronoun its demonstrative force is sometimes very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.V) for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ. without a substantive, in all cases, genders, and numbers, [Refs 8th c.BC+] properly refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter, ὁ δέ the former, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes in Partition, the one, the other, etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in genitive plural, being divided by the ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ, into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι, τῶν δ᾽ αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but frequently the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: so in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; if the Noun be collective, it is in the genitive singular, ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.2) when a negative accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.3) ὁ μέν τις, ὁ δέ τις. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν, ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.4) on τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, or τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs] A.VI.5) ὁ μέν is frequently used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ᾽ ἐσκίδναντο, Μυρμιδόνας δ᾽ οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; by ἄλλος δέ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.6) ὁ δέ following μέν sometimes refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ᾽, ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον. βεβλήκει [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rare in Attic dialect Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.7) ὁ δέ is frequently used simply in continuing a narrative, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.8) the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ᾽ ὁ. οὔθ᾽ ὁ [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VII) the following usages prevailed in Attic dialect Prose, A.VII.1) in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nominative singular masculine καὶ ὅ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Article were used (see. ὅς [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.I and cf. Sanskrit sas, alternatative form of sa); so, in accusative, καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VII.2) ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but mostly in accusative, καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ᾽ ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII) absolutely usages of single cases, A.VIII.1) feminine dative τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.b) with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —only poetry A.VIII.1.c) of Manner, τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν in this way, thus, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.d) repeated, τῇ μέν, τῇ δέ, in one way, in another, or partly, partly, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.e) relative, where, by which way, only Epic dialect, as [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2) neuter dative τῷ, therefore, on this account, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2.b) thus, so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.3) neuter accusative τό, wherefore, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also τὸ δέ absolutely, but the fact is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (compare above[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, [Refs 1st c.BC+] A.VIII.4) τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, partly, partly, or on the one hand, on the other, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι [Refs] several times. and finally, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5) of Time, sometimes that time, sometimes this (present) time, συνμαχία κ᾽ ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) [Refs 6th c.BC+] from that time, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.b) πρὸ τοῦ, sometimes written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.c) in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (literal before this [day]), and to-day's, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.VIII.6) ἐν τοῖς is frequently used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος (πρώτοις codices) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] the greatest number of ships, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with adverbs, ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον [Refs 1st c.BC+] B) ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signification in the earliest Gr, becoming commoner later. In [Refs 8th c.BC+] the demonstrative force can generally be traced, [Refs 4th c.BC+] I, but the definite Article must be recognized in places [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also when joined to an adjective to make it a substantive, αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον the hindmost man, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in τῶν ἄλλων [Refs]; also τὸ τρίτον[Refs]; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest,[Refs]—The true Article, however, is first fully established in 5th C Attic dialect, whilst the demonstrative usage disappears, except in a few cases, V. [Refs 4th c.BC+] —Chief usages, especially in _Attic dialect_ B.I) not only with common Appellats, adjectives, and Parts, to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also frequently where we use the Possessive pronoun, τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.b) omitted with proper nounsand frequently with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, see at {θεός} [Refs] III; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare Θράσυλος in [Refs]; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with proper nouns, save to give peculiar emphasis, like Latin ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.c) Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in [Refs] when he means the Platonic Socrates, as [Refs] B.I.d) for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc, see at {καί} [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.2) in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν. λεύσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.I.2.b) frequently with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.3) of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, see at {γεωγράφος}, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός. B.I.4) with infinitives, which thereby become Substantives, τὸ εἴργειν prevention, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.5) in neuter before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man; τὸ λέγω the word λέγ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', [Refs]; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ᾽ ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if. ', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.6) before relative clauses, when the Article serves to combine the whole relative clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν, καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.7) before Prons, B.I.7.a) before the person Prons, giving them greater emphasis, but only in accusative, τὸν ἐμέ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ[Refs] B.I.7.b) before the interrogative pronoun (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ποίας μερίδο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοῖς ποίοις; [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.7.c) with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc, the Article either makes the pronoun into a substantive, ὁ τοιοῦτος that sort of person, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or subjoins it to a substantive which already has an Article, τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.8) before ἅπας, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, [Refs 4th c.BC+] see entry; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs] B.I.9) the Article with the comparative is rare, if ἤ follows, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) elliptic expressions: B.II.1) before the genitive of a proper name, to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (i.e. υἱός) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (i.e. θυγάτηρ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M.the wife of [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.2) generally, before a genitive it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, [Refs]; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, [Refs]; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, [Refs]; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+] what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: and with genitive of [Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, [NT+5th c.BC+] B.II.3) very frequently with cases governed by Preps. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπ᾽ Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, [Refs] B.II.4) on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc, see at {μά} IV. B.II.5) in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (i.e. ὁδόν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ αὔριον (i.e. ἡμέρα), see at {αὔριον}; ἡ Λυδιστί (i.e. ἁρμονία) [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; but τό stands absolutely with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a substantive, as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects; both in nominative singular masculine ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, [Refs]; and in the forms beginning with τ, especially in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also in Ionic dialect Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; τό [Refs]; τῶν[Refs]—Never in Comedy texts or Attic dialect Prose:—Epic dialect genitive singular τεῦ [Refs 8th c.BC+] D) CRASIS OF ARTICLE: D.a) Attic dialect ὁ, ἡ, τό, with ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιο; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθ; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντο; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([musical notation]), Ionic dialect οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (see. ἕτερος), Attic dialect feminine ἡτέρα, dative θητέρᾳ (see. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc, before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (frequently written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Papyrus); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί=αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ. D.b) other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g, Doric dialect ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς-[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή [Refs 1st c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Pronounciation:
to
Language:
Greek
Definition:
the (sometimes to be supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom); the, this, that, one, he, she, it, etc; the definite article
heart
Strongs:
Lexicon:
καρδία
Greek:
καρδίᾳ
Transliteration:
kardia
Context:
Next word
Morphhology:
Noun Dative Singular Feminine
Grammar:
a female PERSON OR THING that something is done for‚ or in relation to
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
καρδία
Transliteration:
kardia
Gloss:
heart
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Female
Definition:
καρδία, -ας, ἡ, [in LXX chiefly for לֵבָב,לֵב;] the heart, 1) the bodily organ which is regarded as the seat of life (2Ki.18:14, 4Ki.9:24, al.). 2) In a psychological sense, the seat of man's collective energies, the focus of personal life, the seat of the rational as well as the emotional and volitional elements in human life, hence that wherein lies the moral and religious condition of the man (DB, ii, 317f; DGG, ii, 344a); (a) of the seat of physical life (Jdg.19:5, Psa.101 (102):5 103 (104):15): Act.14:17, Jas.5:5; (b) of the seat of spiritual life: Mat.5:8, Mrk.7:19, Luk.1:51, Act.5:3, Rom.10:9, 10 Eph.6:5, al; pl, Mat.9:4, Mrk.2:6, al; opposite to στόμα, χείλεα, πρόσωπον, Mat.15:8, Mrk.7:6, Rom.10:8, 9 2Co.5:12; περιτομὴ καρδίας, Rom.2:29; ἐκ κ, Rom.6:17, 1Pe.1:22; ἀπὸ τῶν κ, Mat.18:35; ἐν ὅλῃ (ἐξ ὅλης), Mat.22:37, Mrk.12:30 " (LXX); γινώσκειν (ἐρευνᾶν, δοκιμάζειν) τὰς κ, Luk.16:15, Rom.8:27, 1Th.2:4; to think, etc, ἐν τ. κ, Mat.9:4, Mrk.2:6, Luk.12:45, Rom.10:6; συνιέναι (νοεῖν) τῇ κ, Mat.13:15, Jhn.12:40; ἐπαχύνθη ἡ κ, Mat.13:15 (LXX); πωροῦν τὴν κ, Jhn.12:40; κ. εὐθεῖα, Act.8:21; πονηρά, Heb.3:12; ἀμετανόητος, Rom.2:5; εἶναι (ἔχειν) ἐν τῇ κ, 2Co.7:3, Php.1:7; ὀδύνη τῇ κ, Rom.9:2. 3) Of the central or innermost part of anything (of the pith of wood, Arist.): τ. γῆς, Mat.12:40 (Cremer, 343ff.). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
καρδία
Transliteration:
kardia
Gloss:
heart
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Female
Definition:
καρδί-α, ἡ, Ionic dialect καρδίη, Epic dialect κρᾰδίη (καρδίη in [Refs 8th c.BC+] only in καρδίῃ ἄλληκτον πολεμίζειν ἠδὲ μάχεσθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+] always in Trag, except in some dact. and anapaest meter verses, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect κάρζα [Refs] (but καρδία [Refs 7th c.BC+] κορζία (Paph.), [Refs 5th c.AD+]:—heart, ἐν δέ τέ οἱ κραδίη μεγάλα στέρνοισι πατάσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πηδᾷ ἡ κ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]: especially as the seat of feeling and passion, as rage or anger, οἰδάνεται κραδίη Χόλῳ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; καρδίης πλέως full of heart, [Refs 7th c.BC+]; of fear or courage, κυνὸς ὄμματ᾽ ἔχων, κραδίην δ᾽ ἐλάφοιο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; [σφηκῶν] κραδίην καὶ θυμὸν ἔχοντες [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν νέον τίνα οἴει κ. ἴσχει; what do you think are his feelings? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of sorrow or joy, ἐν κραδίῃ μέγα πένθος ἄεξε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κελαινόχρως. πάλλεταί μου κ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of love, Sapph.[same place], etc; ἐκ τῆς κ. φιλεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φιλέειν ἀπὸ κ. [Refs 3rd c.BC+]. to speak freely, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; λαλῆσαι ἐπὶ καρδίαν τινός speak kindly to, [LXX] 2) inclination, desire, purpose, ἔμ᾽ ὀτρύνει κραδίη καὶ θυμός [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πρόφρων κ. ἐν πάντεσσι πόνοισι[Refs 5th c.BC+] 3) mind, ὡς ἄνοον κραδίην ἔχες [Refs 8th c.BC+], compare 7.2; διαλογισμοὶ ἀναβαίνουσι ἐν τῇ κ. [NT] II) cardiac orifice of the stomach, [Refs 5th c.BC+] III) heart in wood, pith, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ={ἐντεριώνη},[Refs] IV) metaphorically, κ. θαλάσσης depths of the sea, [LXX] V) Κ. Λέοντος, name of the star [Refs 5th c.BC+] [kcirc]ṛd-, cf. Latin cor(d)-, Lithuanian širdis 'heart', etc.)
Strongs
Word:
καρδία
Transliteration:
kardía
Pronounciation:
kar-dee'-ah
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Noun Feminine
Definition:
the heart, i.e. (figuratively) the thoughts or feelings (mind); also (by analogy) the middle; (+ broken-)heart(-ed); prolonged from a primary (Latin cor, "heart")
they may understand
Strongs:
Lexicon:
συνίημι
Greek:
συνῶσιν
Transliteration:
sunōsin
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
to understand
Morphhology:
Verb 2nd Aorist Active Subjunctive 3rd Plural
Grammar:
an ACTION that maybe happened - by people or things being discussed
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
συνίημι
Transliteration:
suniēmi
Gloss:
to understand
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
συν-ίημι and συνίω (see Bl, § 23, 7), [in LXX chiefly for בִּין hi, שָׂכַל hi;] 1) to bring or set together. 2) Metaphorical, to perceive, understand: Mat.13:13-15 (LXX), Mat.13:19 15:10, Mrk.4:9 (WH, mg.), Mrk.4:12 7:14 8:17, 21 Luk.8:10, Act.7:25 28:26-27, Rom.15:21 " (LXX), 2Co.10:12; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.13:23, 51, Luk.2:50 18:34 24:45; before ὅτι, Mat.16:12 17:13; before quæst. indir, Eph.5:17; ἐπὶ τ. ἄρτοις, Mrk.6:52; as subst, συνίων (ὁ σ, WH, mg.), a man of understanding, i.e. in moral and religious sense, Rom.3:11 (LXX). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
συνίημι
Transliteration:
suniēmi
Gloss:
to understand
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
συνίημι, also ξυν-, 2nd pers. singular ξυνίης [ῑ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular and plural συνίει, συνίουσι, [LXX]; imperative ξυνίει [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular subjunctive συνιῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; infinitive συνιέναι, Epic dialect -ῑέμεν[LXX+8th c.BC+]; participle ξυνῑείς [LXX+5th c.BC+]: imperfect συνίην [Refs 3rd c.AD+]; συνίειν (assuming variant) [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; 3rd.pers. singular ξυνίει [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ξυνίεσαν [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect ξύνιεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future συνήσω [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist 1 συνῆκα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic dialect ξυνέηκα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; but aorist 2 imperative ξύνες, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; plural σύνετε variant in [NT]; participle συνείς [Refs 5th c.BC+] and ; Aeolic dialect σύνεις [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect infinitive συνέμεν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect συνεῖκα [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; Doric dialect[Refs 1st c.AD+]; perfect participle συνεικώς probable reading in [Refs 8th c.BC+] we find of present, only imperative ξυνίει [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ofimperfect, 3rd.pers. plural ξύνιεν for ξυνίεσαν, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of aorist 1, Epic dialect 3rd.pers. singular ξυνέηκ; of aorist 2, imperative ξύνες [Refs]; of aorist 2 middle, 3rd.pers. singular ξύνετο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; subjunctive 1st pers. plural συνώμεθα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; all except the last form with ξυν, though seldom required by the verse. [As in ἵημι, the 1st pers. syllable is short in Epic dialect, long in Trag. and Comedy texts: [Refs 8th c.BC+] ξυνιημι in a dactylic verse, [Refs 5th c.BC+] ξυνιημι in an iambic trimeter, [Refs 4th c.BC+] I) bring or set together, in hostile sense, τίς τ᾽ ἄρ σφωε. ἔριδι ξυνέηκε μάχεσθα; [Refs 8th c.BC+]; but ἀμφοτέρῃς. ἕνα ξυνέηκεν ὀϊστόν shot one arrow at both together, [Refs 5th c.AD+] I.2) middle, come together, come to an agreement, ὄφρα. συνώμεθα. ἀμφὶ γάμῳ [Refs 8th c.BC+] I.3) send herewith, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] II) metaphorically, perceive, hear, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] (who also has middle in this sense, ἀγορεύοντος ξύνετο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; καὶ κωφοῦ συνίημι Orac cited in [Refs 8th c.BC+] II.2) to be aware of, take notice of, observe, τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]: with accusative, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: followed by a relative, ξύνες δὲ τήνδ᾽, ὡς. χωρεῖ [Refs 6th c.BC+] II.3) understand, ξ. ἀλλήλων understand one another's language, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εὖ λέγοντος. τοῦ Δελφικοῦ γράμματος οὐ σ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] to the intelligent, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; in Comedy texts dialogue, parenthetically, συνίη; like{μανθάνεις}; Latin tenes? [Refs 4th c.BC+]; οὐχὶ ξυνίη; [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also followed by a clause, οὐ ξυνιᾶσιν ὅκως. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; σ. τὸ γράμμα ὃ βούλεται [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also, like other Verbs of perception, with participle, ξυνιᾶσι τιμώμενοι [Refs 3rd c.AD+]; οὐ συνίης καταναλίσκω; [Refs 1st c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
συνίημι
Transliteration:
syníēmi
Pronounciation:
soon-ee'-ay-mee
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Verb
Definition:
to put together, i.e. (mentally) to comprehend; by implication, to act piously; consider, understand, be wise; from g4862 (σύν) and (to send)
and
Strongs:
Lexicon:
καί
Greek:
καὶ
Transliteration:
kai
Context:
Next word
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kai
Gloss:
and
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
καί, conj., and I. Copulative. 1) Connecting single words; (a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. (b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; (with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. 2) Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult; esp. (a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss, LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al; (b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; (with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al; (d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al; (e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. 3) Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. 4) In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). 5) καὶ. καί, both. and (for τε. καί, see: τε); (a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al; (b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult; esp. with pron, adv, etc, Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ, Act.11:17; καθὼς κ, Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ, Rom.6:11; διὸ κ, Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss, BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ. (Bl, §77, 7; Deiss, BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ, 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ, Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl, §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; 1) with subjc. (cl.); (a) pres: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al; { (b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al; = cl. εἰ, with opt, Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7 " (LXX). 2) C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss, BS, 201f, LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl, §65, 4); (a) fut: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; (b) pres: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). 3) With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl, §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl, l.with), with subjc. pres, Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor, Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft, Ellic, in ll.); ἐ. τε. ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם. אִם, Est.19:13, al,] Rom.14:8. 4) = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf, Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f; Bl, §26, 4; Mayser, 152f; Deiss, BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ, Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al; ὅπου ἐ, Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ, Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ, 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ, 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ, Gal.5:10. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kai
Gloss:
and
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
καί, conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences, A) and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and, A.I) joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.I.2) to addalimiting or defining expression, πρὸς μακρὸν ὄρος κ. Κύνθιον ὄχθον to the mountain and specially to, [Refs 5th c.BC+] (sometimes in reverse order, πρὸς δῶμα Διὸς κ. μακρὸν Ὄλυμπον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; to add by way of climax, θεῶν. κ. Ποσειδῶνος all the gods, and above all. , [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently ἄλλοι τε καί, ἄλλως τε καί, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs]; ὀλίγου τινὸς ἄξια κ. οὐδενός little or nothing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. ταῦτα and this too. , γελᾶν ἀναπείθειν, κ. ταῦθ᾽ οὕτω πολέμιον ὄντα τῷ γέλωτι [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II) at the beginning of a sentence, A.II.1) in appeals or requests, καί μοι δὸς τὴν Χεῖρα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; καί μοι λέγε, καί μοι ἀπόκριναι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently in Oratt, καί μοι λέγε. τὸ ψήφισμα, καί μοι ἀνάγνωθι, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.2) in questions, to introduce an objection or express surprise, κ. τίς τόδ᾽ ἐξίκοιτ᾽ ἂν ἀγγέλων τάχο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; κ. πῶς; pray how? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. δὴ τί; but then what? [Refs]; κ. ποῖον; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τίς εἶδε πώποτε βοῦς κριβανίτα; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κἄπειτ᾽ ἔκανε; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τίς πώποτε Χαριζόμενος ἑτέρῳ τοῦτο εἰργάσατ; [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.3) ={καίτοι}, and yet, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.4) at the beginning of a speech, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III) after words implying sameness or like ness, as, γνώμῃσι ἐχρέωντο ὁμοίῃσι κ. σύ they had the same opinion as you, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἴσον or ἴσα κ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν ἴσῳ (i.e. ἐστὶ) κ. εἰ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.2) after words implying comparison or opposition, αἱ δαπάναι οὐχ ὁμοίως κ. πρίν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.3) to express simultaneity, ἦν ἦμαρ δεύτερον, κἀγὼ κατηγόμην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; παρέρχονταί τε μέσαι νύκτες κ. ψύχεται [τὸ ὕδωρ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι] οὐκ ἔφθασαν τὴν ἀρχὴν κατασχόντες κ. Θηβαίοις εὐθὺς ἐπεβούλευσαν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.IV) joining an affirmative clause with a negative, ἀλλ᾽ ὥς τι δράσων εἷρπε κοὐ θανούμενος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.V) καί, καί. correlative, not only, but also. , κ. ἀεὶ κ. νῦν, κ. τότε κ. νῦν, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) by anacoluthon, ὣς φαμένη κ. κερδοσύνῃ ἡγήσατ᾽ Ἀθήνη, for ὣς ἔφη κ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔρχεται δὲ αὐτή τε. κ. τὸν υἱὸν ἔχουσα, for κ. ὁ υἱός, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B) even, also, just, B.1) τάχα κεν κ. ἀναίτιον αἰτιόῳτο even the innocent, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δόμεναι κ. μεῖζον ἄεθλον an even greater prize, [Refs]full five,[Refs 5th c.BC+] two or three, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2) also, κ. ἐγώ I also, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. αὐτοί they also, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἀγίας καὶ Σωκράτης κ. τούτω ἀπεθανέτην likewise died, [Refs]; in adding surnames, etc, Ὦχος ὁ κ. Δαρειαῖος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; nominative ὁ κ. first in [Refs 1st c.BC+], frequently later, [Refs 2nd c.AD+], etc; Ἰούδας ὁ κ. Μακκαβαῖος [NT+8th c.BC+]; εἴπερ τι κ. ἄλλο, ὥς τις κ. ἄλλος, [Refs 5th c.BC+], not only, but also. , see at {μόνος}; οὐδὲν μᾶλλον. ἢ οὐ καὶ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2.b) frequently used both in the antecedent and relative clause, where we put also in the antecedent only, εἰ μὲν κ. σὺ εἶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ὧνπερ κ. ἐγώ [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.3) frequently in apodosi, after temporal Conjs, ἀλλ᾽ ὅτε δή ῥα, κ. τότε δή. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also after εἰ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: as a Hebraism, κ. ἐγένετο. κ. [LXX+NT] B.4) with Advs, to give emphasis, κ. κάρτα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. λίην full surely, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. πάλαι, κ. πάνυ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. μάλα, κ. σφόδρα, in answers, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.5) with words expressing a minimum, even so much as, were it but, just, ἱέμενος κ. καπνὸν ἀποθρῴσκοντα νοῆσαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷς ἡδὺ κ. λέγειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τίς δὲ κ. προσβλέψετα; who will so much as look at you? [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.6) just, τοῦτ᾽ αὐτὸ κ. νοσοῦμεν 'tis just that that ails me, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: frequently with a relative, τὸ κ. κλαίουσα τέτηκα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; and how long ago was the city sacked? [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ποῦ καί σφε θάπτε; where is he burying her? [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.7) even, just, implying assent, ἔπειτά με κ. λίποι αἰών thereafter let life e'en leave me, [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.8) κ. εἰ even if, of a whole condition represented as an extreme case, opposed to εἰ κ. although, notwithstanding that, of a condition represented as immaterial even if fulfilled,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰ κ. ἠπιστάμην if I had been able, [Refs 5th c.BC+] each exert their force separtely, as εἴ περ ἀδειής τ᾽ ἐστί, καὶ εἰ. and if. [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.9) before a Participle, to represent either καὶ εἰ, or εἰ καί, although, albeit, Ἕκτορα κ. μεμαῶτα μάχης σχήσεσθαι ὀΐω, for ἢν κ. μεμάῃ, how much soever he rage, although he rage, [Refs 8th c.BC+] C) Position: καί and, is by Poets sometimes put after another word, ἔγνωκα, τοῖσδε κοὐδὲν ἀντειπεῖν ἔχω, for καὶ τοῖσδε οὐδέν [Refs 4th c.BC+] C.2) καί also, sometimes goes between a preposition and its case, ἐν κ. θαλάσσᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.3) very seldom at the end of a verse, [Refs 5th c.BC+] D) crasis: with ᾰ, as κἄν, κἀγαθοί, etc; with ε, as κἀγώ, κἄπειτα, etc, Doric dialect κἠγώ, κἤπειτα, etc; with η, as Χἠ, Χἠμέρη, Χἠμεῖς, etc; with ῐ in Χἰκετεύετε, Χἰλαρ; with ο, as Χὠ, Χὤστις, etc; with υ in Χὐμεῖς, Χὐποχείριον, etc; with ω in the pronoun ᾧ, Χ; with αι, as κᾀσχρῶ; with αυ, as καὐτό; with ει, as κεἰ, κεἰς (but also κἀς), κᾆτ; with εὐ, as κεὐγένεια, κεὐσταλή; with οι in Χοἰ (Χᾠ [Refs]; with ου in Χοὖτος, κοὐ, κοὐδέ, and the like.
Strongs
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kaí
Pronounciation:
kahee
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Definition:
and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in connection (or composition) with other particles or small words; and, also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when, yet; apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also a cumulative force
may turn
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ἐπιστρέφω
Greek:
ἐπιστρέψωσιν
Transliteration:
epistrepsōsin
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
to turn
Morphhology:
Verb Aorist Active Subjunctive 3rd Plural
Grammar:
an ACTION that maybe happened - by people or things being discussed
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
ἐπιστρέφω
Transliteration:
epistrephō
Gloss:
to turn
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
ἐπι-στρέφω [very frequently in LXX, chiefly for שׁוּב, in its various senses, also for פָּנָה, etc;] 1) trans, to turn about, round or towards, hence metaphorically, to turn, cause to return (to God, virtue, etc.): Luk.1:16-17 (cf. Mal.3:24), Jas.5:19-20. 2) Intrans, (a) to turn, turn oneself around: Act.16:18; with inf, Rev.1:12; before πρός, Act.9:40; so also pass. (cl.), Mrk.5:30 8:33, Jhn.21:20; metaphorically, of turning to God (see Field, Notes, 246 ff.), ἐπὶ τ. κύριον (θεόν), Act.9:35 11:21 14:15 15:19 26:20; πρὸς τ. θεόν, 1Th.1:9, 2Co.3:16; ἀπὸ σκότους εἰς φῶς, Act.26:18; pass, 1Pe.2:25; (b) to return (as in MGr.): Luk.8:55, Act.15:36; before ὀπίσω, with inf, Mat.24:18; before εἰς, Mat.12:44, Mrk.13:16, Luk.2:39 17:31; ἐπί, 2Pe.2:22; metaphorically, before ἐπί, Gal.4:9; πρός, Luk.17:4; of moral reform, Mat.13:15, Mrk.4:12, Luk.22:32, Act.3:19 28:27; pass, Mat.10:13 (Cremer, 531, 881). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ἐπιστρέφω
Transliteration:
epistrephō
Gloss:
to turn
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
ἐπι-στρέφω, perfect ἐπέστροφα [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—turn about, turn round, νῶτον Oracle texts cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐ. τὰς ναῦς tack [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also, put an enemy to flight, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; wheel about, τοὺς ἱππεῖς [Refs 1st c.AD+]; wheel through a right angle, [Refs 1st c.BC+] b). intransitive, turn about, turn round, ἕλκε δ᾽ ἐπιστρέψας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; here only in [Refs 8th c.BC+], and perhaps transitive, whirl, but see [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of ships, put about, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; of a wild boar, turn upon the hunter, ἐπί τινα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; return, ἀπὸ τῆς στρατείας Epist. Philipp. in [NT]; of an illness, recur, falsa lectio for{ὑπο-}, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: as Hebraism, with infinitive, as periphrasis of πάλιν, ἐπιστρέψει. εὐφρανθῆναι [LXX]; so with καί and finite Verb, ἐπέστρεψεν καὶ ᾠκοδόμησεν[LXX] 2). turn towards, νόημα [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἐ. τινά turn his attention towards one, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; τινὰ πρός τι, εἰς ἑαυτόν, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; οἱ τὴν Ἑλλάδα ἐπεστροφότες ἐπὶ σοφίαν [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἐ. πίστιν press a pledge upon one, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐ. τὴν φάλαγγα bring it into action, [Refs 1st c.AD+] 2.b). intransitive, turn (oneself) towards, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐ. εἰς or πρὸς ἑαυτόν, of νοῦς, reflect, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]; τὸ ἐπιστρέφον βαθρικόν the steps leading to the sarcophagus, Judeich Altertümervon Hierapolis [Refs] 3). turn or convert from an error, correct, cause to repent, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; warn, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; coerce, [Refs 4th c.AD+] 3.b). passive, to be converted, return, ἐπὶ Κύριον [LXX]; intransitive, repent,[LXX+NT] 3.c). Philos, cause to return to the source of Being, τινὰς εἰς τὰ ἐναντία καὶ τὰ πρῶτα [Refs 3rd c.AD+]:—passive, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]; τὸ προϊὸν ἀπό τινος -στρέφεται πρὸς ἐκεῖνο ἀφ᾽ οὗ πρόεισιν [Refs 5th c.AD+]:—also intransitive in active, ἐ. εἰς ἑαυτόν [Refs 3rd c.AD+]; τὸ γεννηθὲν φύσει πρὸς τὸ γεννῆσαν ἐ. [Refs 3rd c.AD+]; οὐδὲν τῶν σωμάτων πρὸς ἑαυτὸ πέφυκεν ἐ. [Refs 5th c.AD+] 4). curve, twist, ὀδύνη σε περὶ τὰ σπλάγχν᾽ ἔοικ᾽ ἐπιστρέφειν variant in [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, to be distorted, ἢν τράχηλος ἐπιστραφῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of hair, curl, οἷς ἐπέστραπται τὸ τρίχιον [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἐπεστραμμένος, of a tree, crooked, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; of fir-needles, bent, [Refs] II). middle and passive, especially in aorist 2 passive ἐπεστράφην [ᾰ], also ἐπεστρέφθην [Refs 3rd c.AD+]: Doric dialect 3rd.pers. singular future passive -στραφησεῖται[Refs]:—turn oneself round, turn about, ἤϊε ἐπιστρεφόμενος constantly turning, as if to look behind one, [Refs 5th c.BC+] turned to gaze on it, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so of a lion retreating, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; δι᾽ οὗ πάσας ἐπιστρέφεσθαι τὰς περιφοράς by which all the revolving spheres are turned, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δόξα τῇδ᾽ ἐπεστράφη thus turned about, changed, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.2). go back-and forwards, πάντῃ [Refs]; κατ᾽ ἄλσος [Refs 4th c.BC+] wanders over the earth, with collateral sense of observing, studying it, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also with accusative loci, turn to a place, πόθεν γῆς τῆσδ᾽ ἐπεστράφης πέδο; [Refs 5th c.BC+] walk in. , [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of the sun, revolve, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] II.3). turn the mind towards, pay attention to, regard [Refs 6th c.BC+]; τῶν ἰδίων οὐδὲν ἐ. [Refs 6th c.BC+]: absolutely, return to oneself, pay attention, ἐπιστραφείς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐκ ἐπεστράφη, ={οὐκ ἐφρόντισε} (just above), [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.3.b). conduct oneself, behave, ἀξίως τᾶς τιμᾶς [Refs 3rd c.BC+] II.4). c.accusative, θεοῦ νιν κέλευσμ᾽ ἐπεστράφη turned against her, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.5). perfect participle passive ἐπεστραμμένος, ={ἐπιστρεφής}, earnest, vehement, λέγειν ἐπεστραμμένα [Refs 5th c.BC+]
Strongs
Word:
ἐπιστρέφω
Transliteration:
epistréphō
Pronounciation:
ep-ee-stref'-o
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Verb
and
Strongs:
Lexicon:
καί
Greek:
καὶ
Transliteration:
kai
Context:
Next word
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kai
Gloss:
and
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
καί, conj., and I. Copulative. 1) Connecting single words; (a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. (b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; (with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. 2) Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult; esp. (a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss, LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al; (b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; (with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al; (d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al; (e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. 3) Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. 4) In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). 5) καὶ. καί, both. and (for τε. καί, see: τε); (a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al; (b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult; esp. with pron, adv, etc, Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ, Act.11:17; καθὼς κ, Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ, Rom.6:11; διὸ κ, Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss, BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ. (Bl, §77, 7; Deiss, BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ, 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ, Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl, §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; 1) with subjc. (cl.); (a) pres: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al; { (b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al; = cl. εἰ, with opt, Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7 " (LXX). 2) C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss, BS, 201f, LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl, §65, 4); (a) fut: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; (b) pres: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). 3) With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl, §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl, l.with), with subjc. pres, Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor, Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft, Ellic, in ll.); ἐ. τε. ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם. אִם, Est.19:13, al,] Rom.14:8. 4) = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf, Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f; Bl, §26, 4; Mayser, 152f; Deiss, BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ, Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al; ὅπου ἐ, Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ, Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ, 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ, 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ, Gal.5:10. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kai
Gloss:
and
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
καί, conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences, A) and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and, A.I) joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.I.2) to addalimiting or defining expression, πρὸς μακρὸν ὄρος κ. Κύνθιον ὄχθον to the mountain and specially to, [Refs 5th c.BC+] (sometimes in reverse order, πρὸς δῶμα Διὸς κ. μακρὸν Ὄλυμπον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; to add by way of climax, θεῶν. κ. Ποσειδῶνος all the gods, and above all. , [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently ἄλλοι τε καί, ἄλλως τε καί, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs]; ὀλίγου τινὸς ἄξια κ. οὐδενός little or nothing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. ταῦτα and this too. , γελᾶν ἀναπείθειν, κ. ταῦθ᾽ οὕτω πολέμιον ὄντα τῷ γέλωτι [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II) at the beginning of a sentence, A.II.1) in appeals or requests, καί μοι δὸς τὴν Χεῖρα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; καί μοι λέγε, καί μοι ἀπόκριναι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently in Oratt, καί μοι λέγε. τὸ ψήφισμα, καί μοι ἀνάγνωθι, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.2) in questions, to introduce an objection or express surprise, κ. τίς τόδ᾽ ἐξίκοιτ᾽ ἂν ἀγγέλων τάχο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; κ. πῶς; pray how? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. δὴ τί; but then what? [Refs]; κ. ποῖον; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τίς εἶδε πώποτε βοῦς κριβανίτα; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κἄπειτ᾽ ἔκανε; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τίς πώποτε Χαριζόμενος ἑτέρῳ τοῦτο εἰργάσατ; [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.3) ={καίτοι}, and yet, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.4) at the beginning of a speech, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III) after words implying sameness or like ness, as, γνώμῃσι ἐχρέωντο ὁμοίῃσι κ. σύ they had the same opinion as you, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἴσον or ἴσα κ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν ἴσῳ (i.e. ἐστὶ) κ. εἰ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.2) after words implying comparison or opposition, αἱ δαπάναι οὐχ ὁμοίως κ. πρίν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.3) to express simultaneity, ἦν ἦμαρ δεύτερον, κἀγὼ κατηγόμην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; παρέρχονταί τε μέσαι νύκτες κ. ψύχεται [τὸ ὕδωρ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι] οὐκ ἔφθασαν τὴν ἀρχὴν κατασχόντες κ. Θηβαίοις εὐθὺς ἐπεβούλευσαν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.IV) joining an affirmative clause with a negative, ἀλλ᾽ ὥς τι δράσων εἷρπε κοὐ θανούμενος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.V) καί, καί. correlative, not only, but also. , κ. ἀεὶ κ. νῦν, κ. τότε κ. νῦν, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) by anacoluthon, ὣς φαμένη κ. κερδοσύνῃ ἡγήσατ᾽ Ἀθήνη, for ὣς ἔφη κ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔρχεται δὲ αὐτή τε. κ. τὸν υἱὸν ἔχουσα, for κ. ὁ υἱός, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B) even, also, just, B.1) τάχα κεν κ. ἀναίτιον αἰτιόῳτο even the innocent, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δόμεναι κ. μεῖζον ἄεθλον an even greater prize, [Refs]full five,[Refs 5th c.BC+] two or three, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2) also, κ. ἐγώ I also, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. αὐτοί they also, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἀγίας καὶ Σωκράτης κ. τούτω ἀπεθανέτην likewise died, [Refs]; in adding surnames, etc, Ὦχος ὁ κ. Δαρειαῖος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; nominative ὁ κ. first in [Refs 1st c.BC+], frequently later, [Refs 2nd c.AD+], etc; Ἰούδας ὁ κ. Μακκαβαῖος [NT+8th c.BC+]; εἴπερ τι κ. ἄλλο, ὥς τις κ. ἄλλος, [Refs 5th c.BC+], not only, but also. , see at {μόνος}; οὐδὲν μᾶλλον. ἢ οὐ καὶ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2.b) frequently used both in the antecedent and relative clause, where we put also in the antecedent only, εἰ μὲν κ. σὺ εἶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ὧνπερ κ. ἐγώ [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.3) frequently in apodosi, after temporal Conjs, ἀλλ᾽ ὅτε δή ῥα, κ. τότε δή. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also after εἰ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: as a Hebraism, κ. ἐγένετο. κ. [LXX+NT] B.4) with Advs, to give emphasis, κ. κάρτα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. λίην full surely, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. πάλαι, κ. πάνυ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. μάλα, κ. σφόδρα, in answers, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.5) with words expressing a minimum, even so much as, were it but, just, ἱέμενος κ. καπνὸν ἀποθρῴσκοντα νοῆσαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷς ἡδὺ κ. λέγειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τίς δὲ κ. προσβλέψετα; who will so much as look at you? [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.6) just, τοῦτ᾽ αὐτὸ κ. νοσοῦμεν 'tis just that that ails me, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: frequently with a relative, τὸ κ. κλαίουσα τέτηκα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; and how long ago was the city sacked? [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ποῦ καί σφε θάπτε; where is he burying her? [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.7) even, just, implying assent, ἔπειτά με κ. λίποι αἰών thereafter let life e'en leave me, [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.8) κ. εἰ even if, of a whole condition represented as an extreme case, opposed to εἰ κ. although, notwithstanding that, of a condition represented as immaterial even if fulfilled,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰ κ. ἠπιστάμην if I had been able, [Refs 5th c.BC+] each exert their force separtely, as εἴ περ ἀδειής τ᾽ ἐστί, καὶ εἰ. and if. [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.9) before a Participle, to represent either καὶ εἰ, or εἰ καί, although, albeit, Ἕκτορα κ. μεμαῶτα μάχης σχήσεσθαι ὀΐω, for ἢν κ. μεμάῃ, how much soever he rage, although he rage, [Refs 8th c.BC+] C) Position: καί and, is by Poets sometimes put after another word, ἔγνωκα, τοῖσδε κοὐδὲν ἀντειπεῖν ἔχω, for καὶ τοῖσδε οὐδέν [Refs 4th c.BC+] C.2) καί also, sometimes goes between a preposition and its case, ἐν κ. θαλάσσᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.3) very seldom at the end of a verse, [Refs 5th c.BC+] D) crasis: with ᾰ, as κἄν, κἀγαθοί, etc; with ε, as κἀγώ, κἄπειτα, etc, Doric dialect κἠγώ, κἤπειτα, etc; with η, as Χἠ, Χἠμέρη, Χἠμεῖς, etc; with ῐ in Χἰκετεύετε, Χἰλαρ; with ο, as Χὠ, Χὤστις, etc; with υ in Χὐμεῖς, Χὐποχείριον, etc; with ω in the pronoun ᾧ, Χ; with αι, as κᾀσχρῶ; with αυ, as καὐτό; with ει, as κεἰ, κεἰς (but also κἀς), κᾆτ; with εὐ, as κεὐγένεια, κεὐσταλή; with οι in Χοἰ (Χᾠ [Refs]; with ου in Χοὖτος, κοὐ, κοὐδέ, and the like.
Strongs
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kaí
Pronounciation:
kahee
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Definition:
and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in connection (or composition) with other particles or small words; and, also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when, yet; apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also a cumulative force
I will heal
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ἰάομαι
Greek:
ἰάσομαι
Transliteration:
iasomai
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
to heal
Morphhology:
Verb Future Middle Deponent Indicative 1st Singular
Grammar:
an ACTION that will happen - by a person or thing that is speaking or writing
Source:
Identical in Nestle/Aland and other source, minor difference in King James sources
Tyndale
Word:
ἰάομαι
Transliteration:
iaomai
Gloss:
to heal
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
ἰάομαι, -ῶμαι [in LXX for רָפָא (Gen.20:17, al.), exc. Isa.30:26 61:1 (חָבַשׁ);] to heal: with accusative of person(s), Luk.5:17 6:19 9:2, 11 9:42 14:4 22:51, Jhn.4:47, Act.9:34 10:38 28:8; pass, Mat.8:8, 13 15:28, Luk.7:7 8:47 17:15, Jhn.5:13; id. before ἀπό᾽, Mrk.5:29, Luk.6:17; figuratively, of spiritual healing, Mat.13:15, Jhn.12:40, Act.28:27 " (LXX); pass, Heb.12:13, Jas.5:16, 1Pe.2:24. SYN.: θεραπεύω, q.v (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ἰάομαι
Transliteration:
iaomai
Gloss:
to heal
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
ἰάομαι, imperative ἰῶ (see. below), Ionic dialect infinitive ἰᾶσθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]jᾶσθαι [Refs]: future ἰάσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect and Epic dialect ἰήσομαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist ἰασάμην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ἰησάμην [Refs 8th c.BC+] —passive (see. below). [ῑ- in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also ῐ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—heal, cure, in present and imperfect, attempt to cure, treat, of persons or bodies, etc, τινα [Refs 8th c.BC+] 2) cure. treat, of diseases, νόσους [Refs 5th c.BC+]: metaphorically, remedy, δύσγνοιαν, ἀδικίαν ἰᾶσθαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+], i.e. do not make bad worse, [Refs 7th c.BC+] 3) cure the effects of, counteract, ἄκρατος ἰ. τὸ κώνειον [Refs 1st c.AD+] 4) repair, τὸ βλαβέν [LXX+5th c.BC+] II) active only aorist 1 ἰάσαμεν [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; participle ἰάσαντες [Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist ἰάθην is always passive, be healed, recover, [NT+5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ἰήθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future ἰαθήσομαι [Refs 1st c.AD+]: perfect ἴᾱμαι [NT]
Strongs
Word:
ἰάομαι
Transliteration:
iáomai
Pronounciation:
ee-ah'-om-ahee
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Verb
Definition:
to cure (literally or figuratively); heal, make whole; middle voice of apparently a primary verb
them.’
Strongs:
Lexicon:
αὐτός
Greek:
αὐτούς.
Transliteration:
autous
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
he/she/it/self
Morphhology:
Personal pronoun Accusative Plural Masculine
Grammar:
a reference to recently mentioned male people or things that are having something done to them
Source:
Identical in all sources
Additional:
them
Alternates:
Tyndale
Word:
αὐτός
Transliteration:
autos
Gloss:
it/s/he
Morphhology:
Greek Personal Pronoun (3rd person)
Definition:
αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). 1) Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art, see infr, iii); (1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc, αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ, Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al; in late Gk, sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); (2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl, §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al; αὐ, καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. 2) In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al; with ptcp. in genitive absol, Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl, §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff; Bl, §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. 3) ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ, the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ, ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al; τὰ αὐ, Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ, together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ, 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
αὐτός
Transliteration:
autos
Gloss:
it/s/he
Morphhology:
Greek Personal Pronoun (3rd person)
Definition:
αὐτός (Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc, the very one, the same. I) self, myself, thyself, etc, accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10), I.1) one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+] Latin Ipse dixit; so τίς οὗτος;— Αὐτός, i.e. Socrates, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀναβόησον Αὐτόν[Refs]the Master, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the result will show, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; especially αὐτὸ δείξει[Refs 5th c.BC+]; of things, the very, ὑπὸ λόφον αὐτόν, i.e. just, exactly under, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πρὸς αὐταῖς ταῖς θύραις close by the door, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτὸ τὸ δέον the very thing needed, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτὸ τὸ περίορθρον the point of dawn, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτὰ τὰ ἐναντία the very opposite, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even, οὔ μοι μέλει ἄλγος οὔτ᾽ αὐτῆς Ἑκάβης[Refs 8th c.BC+] —In these senses αὐτός in Prose either precedes both the _Article_ and substantive, or follows both, e.g. αὐτὸς ὁ υἱός or ὁ υἱὸς αὐτός. The Article is sometimes omitted with proper names, or Nouns denoting individuals, αὐτὸς Μένων[Refs 5th c.BC+] I.2) of oneself, of one's own accord, ἀλλά τις αὐ. ἴτω[Refs 8th c.BC+]; also, in person, τῶν πραγμάτων ὑμῖν. αὐτοῖς ἀντιληπτέον[Refs 4th c.BC+] I.3) by oneself or itself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αὐτὸς ἐγείναο παῖδ᾽, i.e. without a mother,[Refs 8th c.BC+]by himself, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i.e. among friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτὰ γὰρ ἔστιν ταῦτα these and no others, [Refs 5th c.BC+] himself alone, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αὐτὸς μόνος, see at {μόνος} II; αὐτὸς καθ᾽ αὑτόν, see at {ἑαυτοῦ}. I.4) in Philosophy, by or in itself, of an abstract concept or idea, δίκαιον αὐτό[Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently in this sense, attached to Nouns of all genders, οὐκ αὐτὸ δικαιοσύνην ἐπαινοῦντες ἀλλὰ τὰς ἀπ᾽ αὐτῆς εὐδοκιμήσεις[Refs 5th c.BC+]; more fully, εἰ αὐτὸ τοῦτο πατέρα ἠρώτων, ἆρα ὁ πατήρ ἐστι πατήρ τινος, ἢ ο; [Refs]; ἀδελφός, αὐτὸ τοῦτο ὅπερ ἔστιν the ideal, abstract brother, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; less frequently agreeing with the substantive, ἵνα αὐτὴ δικαιοσύνη πρὸς ἀδικίαν αὐτὴν κριθείη[Refs 5th c.BC+]its very self, [Refs] I.5) in dative with substantive, in one, together, ἀνόρουσεν αὐτῇ σὺν φόρμιγγι he sprang up lyre in hand, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αὐτῇ σὺν πήληκι κάρη helmet and all,[Refs 8th c.BC+] men and all, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτοῖσι συμμάχοισι allies and all, [Refs 5th c.BC+] I.6) added to ordinal Numbers, e.g. πέμπτος αὐτός himself the fifth, i. e. himself with four others, [NT+5th c.BC+] I.7) frequently coupled with οὗτος, τοῦτ᾽ αὐτό ἐστι τὸ ζητηθέν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ταῦτα ἥκω αὐτὰ ἵνα. [Refs 5th c.BC+] I.8) καὶ αὐτός himself too, [Refs 8th c.BC+] I.9) repeated in apodosi for emphasis, αὐτὸς ἐπαγγειλάμενος σώσειν. αὐτὸς ἀπώλεσεν[Refs 5th c.BC+] I.10) in connexion with the person. pronoun, ἐγὼν αὐτός[Refs 8th c.BC+]; followed by an enclitic pronoun, αὐτόν μιν[Refs 8th c.BC+] I.10.b) with person. pronoun omitted, αὐτός. ἧσθαι λιλαίομαι, for ἐγὼ αὐτός, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αὐτὸν ἐλέησον, for ἐμὲ αὐτόν,[Refs 8th c.BC+] is simply a strengthened form of ο; and so in Attic dialect, when σὲ αὐτόν, ἐμοὶ αὐτῷ, etc, are read divisim, they are emphatic, not reflexive; in this case αὐτός generally precedes the person. pronoun,[Refs 5th c.BC+] I.10.c) with the reflexive ἑαυτοῦ, αὑτοῦ, etc, to add force and definiteness, αὐτὸς καθ᾽ αὑτοῦ[Refs 4th c.BC+]; αὐτοὶ ὑφ᾽ αὑτῶν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; sometimes between the Article and reflexive pronoun, τοῖς αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ πήμασιν βαρύνεται[Refs 5th c.BC+] I.10.d) αὐτοῦ, αὐτῶν with possessive pronoun, πατρὸς κλέος ἠδ᾽ ἐμὸν αὐτοῦ[Refs 8th c.BC+]; τοῖς οἷσιν αὐτοῦ[Refs 8th c.BC+] I.10.e) αὐτὸς ἑαυτοῦ with comparative and superlative adjective, αὐτὸς ἑωυτοῦ ῥέει πολλῷ ὑποδεέστερος[Refs 5th c.BC+] I.11) αὐτός for ὁ αὐτός, the same, [Refs 8th c.BC+], and in later Prose, αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις[NT+2nd c.AD+] I.12) comparative αὐτότερος[Refs 5th c.BC+]: superlative αὐτότατος his very self, [Refs 5th c.BC+]. adverb, comparative αὐτοτέρως[Refs 2nd c.AD+] II) he, she, it, for the simple pronoun of 3 person, only in oblique cases (except in later Gk, [NT], and rarely first in a sentence, [NT+5th c.BC+]: rare in Epic dialect, [Refs 8th c.BC+], and mostly emphatic,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; so in Trag, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in Prose, to recall a Noun used earlier in the sentence, ἐγὼ μὲν οὖν βασιλέα. οὐκ οἶδα ὅ τι δεῖ αὐτὸν ὀμόσαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]; after a Relative, ὅς κε θεοῖς ἐπιπείθηται. ἔκλυον αὐτοῦ[Refs 8th c.BC+]; especially where a second Verb requires a change of case in the pronoun, οἳ ἂν ἐξελεγχθῶσι. ὡς προδότας αὐτοὺς ὄντας τιμωρηθῆναι[Refs 5th c.BC+]; later, pleonastically after a Relative, ὧν ὁ μὲν αὐτῶν[NT+5th c.BC+] III) with Article ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό, and Attic dialect contraction αὑτός, αὑτή, ταὐτό and ταὐτόν (as required by the metre,[Refs 5th c.BC+] plural neuter ταὐτ; Ionic dialect ὡυτός, τὠυτό:—the very one, the same, rare in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: with dative, to denote sameness or agreement, especially in Prose, τὠυτὸ ἂν ὑμῖν ἐπρήσσομεν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ αὐτὸς τῷ λίθῳ the same as the stone, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν ταὐτῷ εἶναί τινι to be in the place with, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; προσίεσθαί τινα ἐς ταὐτὸ ἑαυτῷ to have a person meet one,[Refs 5th c.BC+]face to face, [Refs 4th c.AD+] III.2) in later Greek, the said, the above-named, Ἡρώδης ὁ αὐ.[Refs 3rd c.BC+] IV) Adverbial phrases: IV.1) αὐτὸ μόνον simply, merely, [Refs 1st c.AD+] IV.2) αὐτό as adverb, ={ἄρτι}, [Refs] IV.3) αὐτὸ τοῦτο as adverb, [NT+2nd c.BC+] IV.4) with Preps, ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό added together, making a total, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό together, at the same time,[NT], etc; but κατ᾽ αὐτό just then, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] V) In Compos: V.1) of or by oneself, self-, as in αὐτοδίδακτος, αὐτογνώμων, αὐτόματος: and so, independently, as in αὐτοκράτωρ, αὐτόνομος. V.2) hence, as a second self, very, bodily, as with proper names, Αὐτοθαΐς. V.3) in the abstract, the ideal, see above[Refs] V.4) precisely, as in αὐτόδεκα. V.5) rarely with reflexive sense of ἀλλήλων, as in αὐτοκτονέω. V.6) in one piece with, together with, as in αὐτόκωπος, αὐτοχείλης, αὐτόπρεμνος, αὐτόρριζος. V.7) by itself: hence, only, as in αὐτόξυλος, αὐτόποκος.—For αὐτοῦ, αὐτῶς, etc, see the respective Arts.
Strongs
Word:
αὐτός
Transliteration:
autós
Pronounciation:
ow-tos'
Language:
Greek
Definition:
the reflexive pronoun self, used (alone or in the comparative g1438 (ἑαυτοῦ)) of the third person , and (with the proper personal pronoun) of the other persons; her, it(-self), one, the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy- )self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at, - by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man), those, together, very, which; from the particle (perhaps akin to the base of g109 (ἀήρ) through the idea of a baffling wind) (backward)
